5s sabAIb TS eee < ri esto ese ttet ht ne MO : ~ 1 CHE MICAL 8] MEDICAL & g | _ SCIENTIFIC | > | PERIODICALS AND BOOKS pee. Wat + Volume IV. Number 1 WOODS HOLE, MASS., SATURDAY, JULY 6, 1929 Subscription $1.25 Single Copies, 20c OLD CATHOLIC CHURCH GIVEN ANGELUS BELLS Tower to Rise Forty-six Feet (Mrs. Frank R. Lillie has an- nounced that she has given a bell | tower to St. Joseph’s Church of Woods Hole. The tower is to be erected opposite the Church and on the bank of the Eel Pond. Excava- | tion has already started, and the tower is expected to be completed sometime in the late autumn. Mr. Charles A. Coolidge, of the firm of Coolidge, Shepley, Bulfinch and Abbot, is the architect. Mr. Coo- lidge, as many may remember, was the architect of the M. B. L. build- ing. The construction is in the hands of Mr. Wilfred E. Wheeler. The tower is to be 46 feet tall, and is to be constructed of cut granite that has already been weathered; these stones have been collected from a number of aban- doned farm house foundations of this vicinity, and will assure an appearance of venerable age to the edifice. The base of the tower is to contain a small sanctuary which will probably be used to house various art treasures that may be given or loaned from time to time. | The door of this museum is being executed in bronze by Alfeo Faggi of Woodstock, N. Y. and is to depict six scenes from the life of Saint Joseph. The bell ringing ap- paratus will be concealed in a niche in the base. (Continued on Page 3) SUNDAY CONFERENCES AT PENZANCE POINT Dr. and Mrs. Warbasse invite all who are interested to attend the Conferences which will be held at Penzance Point every Sunday afternoon during the summer, at 3 o'clock, beginning the 7th of July. Questions of current interest will be discussed informally. This is a resumption of the con- ferences which were begun in 1913 and discontinued after the war. The resuming of these meetings is in response to the many requests for their continuation. In the past almost every problem of interest has been discussed— social questions, economics, phi- losophy, education, and even the (Continued on Page 2) M. B. L. Calendar Tuesday, July 9, 8:00 P. M. Evening Seminar. Dr eAbby, HH: Turner, Professor of Physiology. Mt. Holyoke College. “The Ad- justment of the Human Circula- tion in Prolonged Standing.” Dr. W. E. Garrey, Professor of Physiology. Vanderbilt Medical School. “The Non-existence of Physiological Leucocytosis.” Drs. D, J. Edwards and McKeen Cattell, Department of Physi- ology. Cornell Medical School. “Some Physiological Effects of Hydrostatic Pressure.”’ Friday, July 12, 8:00 P. M. Evening Lecture. Dr. G. H. Parker, Professor of Zoology. Harvard University. “The Nature of Neurofibrils.”’ THE MARINE BIOLOGICAL LABORATORY IN A Sketch of the Library of the Marine Biological Laboratory Priscitta B. Librarian Nineteen hundred and_twenty- eight, as everyone knows, was the 40th year of the Marine Biological Laboratory at Woods Hole, and the Library shared in this 40th anniversary. The fact that a per- manent library is an essential ele- ment in a research laboratory was not kept in the back-ground by the Founders of the Laboratory, by the Trustees, or by Dr. Whitman, as a development that could come later. Indeed, a ‘small reference library” is mentioned in the ‘First Public Circular, 1888”. The lower floor of the original two-story building (see picture) which was used for Dr. Hecht Delivers Lecture on the Mechanics of Vision THE NATURE OF Dr. Selig Hecht, Professor of delivered an evening lecture bearing VISUAL ACUITY Biophysics at Columbia the above title on June 21. University, A sum- mary by two laboratory members of long standing and a review of the lecture by Professor G. H. Parker are printed here. cumulated very accurate data on the intensity. to discriminate increases first slowly, The early students of the physiological optics of the human eye ac- variation of visual acuity with light As the intensity of the light increases, the power of the eye then rapidly, then slowly again to a maximum. If the acuity is plotted against the logarithm of the intensity, an S-shaped curve is obtained in which the acuity rises very rapidly as the logarithm of the intensity increases through intermediate values. Hither- to, no explanation of this curve has been offered. The curve can be close- ly paralleled by a curve obtained from the integration of a hypothetical 1888 MoNTGOMERY jtwo years, without additions, was designed for “students receiving instruction” and the “upper story exclusively for investigators”. It has been so far impossible for the writer to ascertain whether the small reference library that is men- tioned along with other requisite assets such as “boats”, “dredges”, “running water’, and “alcohol”, was limited to reference texts, and so used during the first season sole- ly for teaching. Since, however, the Trustees in their first Annual Report “‘are much indebted to the Boston Society of Natural History, (Continued on Page 5) distribution curve for the rods and cones, a distribution curve in which the threshold of the rods and cones toward light is plot- ted as a function of the intensity. The visual acuity curve is therefore the result of the variation of the sensory reception in their power to respond to light. Some insight in- to the relative part played by the rods and cones has been obtained through visual acuity studies on certain completely color blind in- dividuals, in whom only the rods function. The first part of the acuity curve follows closely that of the normal human eye, indicating that in the dim light it is the rods which are responsible, while with brighter illumination the color blind eye is quite inferior to the normal. From such data separate curves have been constructed, showing the part played by each of these two elements in the visual acuity at dif- ferent light intensities. As evidence that this view is cor- rect, Hecht brings forward the results of experiments made on lower forms in his laboratory dur- ing the past year. In this work the attempt was made to find an eye as far distant from the human eye as possible. The insect eye was chosen. As the light intensity varies, more and more ommatidia of the insect eye receive beams of light, and assuming here that the thres- hold value is always exceeded, the acuity intensity curve should depend on the arrangement of the omma- tidia. If an acuity intensity curve of the insect eye could be plotted, comparison could then be made be- (Continued on Page 2) PAGE TWO THE COSEECTING NET. VISUAL ACUITY (Continued from Page 1) tween this curve and the integral of the distribution curve of the omma- tidia. Obviously it is not an easy matter to determine the acuity of am insect eye. ' carried out in cooperation with Wolf and Wald an_ ingenious method was finally devised. The insects were allowed to walk up an inclined plane made of glass and illuminated with light of varying intensity. Underneath this glass plane was placed a white surface with black lines ruled at various intervals. When this screen was moved either to the right or the left, the insect if it perceived the move- ment always turned so as to move in a direction opposite to that in which the screen was being transported. In this manner it was found pos- sible to obtain acuity intensity curves for the eyes of the bee. Further experiments have been carried out on the common fruit fly using a modified techmique, the results of which confirm in all par- ticulars the conclusions reached from the work on bees. Moving pictures were shown demonstrating in a very striking manner the re- versal of direction of the progress of the fly with the changes in the direction of the movement of the screen in the background. In a final few sentences Hecht explained that the work on acuity was not oi limited significance but was directly related to one of the fundamental problems of general physiology, inasmuch as it gave additional information regarding the universality of the all-or-none law and its method of operation in nervous and sensory structures. Mention was also made of a second mechanism which in all probability plays a role in the intensity of the sensation experienced; this second factor is the number of impulses passing along the individual nerve fibres per unit of time, evidence for which has accumulated largely through the investigation of Adrian and his pupils. REVIEW By Proressor G. H. Parker Director of Zoological Laboratory, Harvard University For a decade past Hecht has been developing a general concep- tion of vision which in breadth of application and in completeness of detail has not been equalled by any earlier view. The growth of this conception has involved an assimila- tive process which has reduced an incredible amount of observational material to a unified whole and has also led to an extensive series of experiments that have added much to what has already been known about vision. As is shown in the After six months of search| | | preceding summary of the lecture which dealt with that aspect of the | general view that had to do with visual acuity, Hecht presumably | accepts Schultze’s Duplicity Theory of the rods and cones and, with certain reservations, the all-or-none principle of nerve action. In this respect his general view absorbs two most important modern con- ceptions, one for the physiology of vision and the other for that of the nervous system in general. Hecht demonstrated a year or more ago the inadequacy of the Hering six-component hypothesis of color vision, as well as the Ladd- Franklin genetic hypothesis of this sensory activity; for he showed by a most ingenious test that yellow, instead of being a primary sensory phenomenon, as was implied in these two hypotheses, is in reality an affair of the brain. His view is in practical agreement with the Young-Helmholtz theory of color vision in which red, green, and blue are the primary sensory factors. This question was not discussed in Hecht’s recent lecture, but the reader is reminded of it here be- cause of its bearing on the pro- blems considered in that address. According to Hecht’s view on visual acuity the weakest light that can excite the retina stimulates only a few widely scattered rods; hence vision in very dim light is without sharpness, and devoid of color. As the light increases in in- tensity other less sensitive rods be- come active till finally all rods are in action. As rods do not occur in the center of the retina, this dim- light vision is characteristic of the sides of that structure. When the light increases in intensity still more the cones become active, first a few scattered ones and then grad- ually more and more of them till at last all are in action. Thus in cone vision with bright illumination, increase of light is followed by increased participation of numbers of cones and consequently increased acuity. This type of vision occurs in the center of the retinal field where the cones are the only ele- ments present. Cones are the organs of color vision; hence vision of this kind is associated with color sensations. According to Hecht, who in general, is in agreement with Young and Helmholtz, there are three kinds of cones one for each primary color sensation, blue green, and red. The general view thus briefly sketched outlines what the writer understands to be Hecht’s concep- tion of retinal activity. According to it, vision in the center of the retina begins only after a reasonable intensity of light has been attained and is dependent upon scattered individual cones. These cones, however, are assumed in the color- vision portion of the scheme to be differentiated for red, green, and blue. Why is it, then, that on the initiation of cone vision where only single cones are excited their activ- ' writer is the one puzzling aspect of ity is not associated with color sensations. A single point of white light, such as that of a distant star, as it plays over the center of the retina might be expected to change in tint from one primary color to another depending upon the cone momentarily excited. This to the Hecht’s synthesis of color vision and acuity. Unquestionably it can be explained and without much doubt the explanation will be in line with the general trend of Hecht’s conception, for this con- ception marks an advance in our knowledge of retinal activity that has scarcely been approached since the days of Helmholtz. SUNDAY CONFERENCES (Continued from Page 1) question of human liberty. During the war, the discussions of the na- ture of war were so successful, and brought out so much light, that the meetings were watched by zealous patriots and the name of each per- son present was sent to the Depart- ment of Justice at Washington every Monday morning—with the regularity of the wash to the laundry. The meetings will begin prompt-' ly at 3 Sunday afternoons. They are held out of doors. The purpose is to make an opportunity for the interchange of ideas, in the open air, under no academic auspices. Students, teachers, and those who neither study nor teach are in- vited. Students will be encouraged to teach, teachers to study, and others to express themselves as freely as they will and to listen and absorb. The friendly human con- tact of open minds is the object of the meetings. FAMILY ON LEDGE RESCUED Professor Reginald I. Lovell, of the history department of Harvard College, with his wife and son and another lady were out rowing in|} the channel on June 9 at about quarter after two o'clock. They were caught by the strong five-knot current and swept onto a ledge. Their situation, which might have been dangerous, was observed from the Coast Guard station, and P. S. Peckham was sent out in the CG- 200 and succeeded in bringing them safely to shore. ROSE GARDEN AGAIN OPEN Miss Sarah B. Fay’s invitation to everyone to visit her rose garden| on Quissett Avenue is extended this summer as usual. The season was two weeks earlier this year than last, but there may still be seen some very beautiful ramblers and climbers. Other out-of-door varie- ties still in blossom are the hybrid perpetuals, polyanthas, ruosas, Austrian briar, and Penzance sweet | briar, as well as a number of smaller and less hardy plants which are kept in the greenhouses. THUNDERSTORM CAUSES FUNNY HANKY-PANKY On Wednesday, June 19, there was a severe thunderstorm on the Cape. The actual rain and light- ning caused no great nuisance in Woods Hole, but one of their indirect effects did so in an amusing way. It seems that some of the high tension electrical transmission lines that supply Cape Cod were struck. This caused all current to stop. Not only did lights go out everywhere, but what is also natural and logical, though rather surprising to the house-wife who takes everything for granted, the electric ice-boxes began to warm up and the. electric stoves began to cool down. Movies and talkies ceased abruptly. Traffic lights changed from glaring red and pleasant green into a non-com- mittal black. Our rival, THE Fat- MOUTH ENTERPRISE, was stopped dead in its tracks as its press and linotype came to a grinding halt. Some cows were loaded on a boat in the Eel Pond waiting to be trans- ported to Naushon Island. The calamity happened as they were about to go through the bridge; it could not open. What to do? The boat was pitching, the cows were getting fidgety, it was getting dark, and there were no pails nor stools at hand. But the problem was solved marvellously. Skilled hands leaped into action, and the poor cows were milked over the gunwales into the turbulent water. LABORATORY MARINERS STRANDED ON VINEYARD On the morning of July 4 Wilbur Smith went out for a sail in his small boat with three Laboratory comrades, Mr. and Mrs. Paul Bow- man and Miss Louise Schmuck. They left after breakfast and rather hoped to return in time for supper. The strong wind and rough sea pre- vented their making headway back to Woods Hole and forced them to go ashore at some desolate point on Marthas Vineyard. Not long after they landed they were found by some residents of the island and were cared for in a luxurious man- ner over night. The next morning (Friday) they were driven to Oak Bluffs, where they caught an early boat to Woods Hole. The party experienced no ill effects that per- haps one or two members of the party found the ocean uncomfort- ably rough. They are now making plans for the recovery of their boat, which they were forced to leave on Martha’s Vineyard. Dr. Norman Plummer, of the Cornell University Medical School, and Mrs. Plummer are spending the month of July with Dr. and Mrs. Eugene F. Du Bois, who have rented Dr. C. E. Stockard’s house on Crow Hill for the summer. Dr. Plummer’s home is in California. THE COLLECTING NET PAGE THREE Dr. Galtsoff Reports His Work in Oyster Culture | Gillette and Co. of Croydon, Eng- THE PHYSIOLOGY OF FEEDING AND REPRODUCTION OF THE AMERICAN OYSTER 3y Dr. PAut S. GALTSOFF United States Bureau of Fisheries Dr. Paul S. Galtsoff delivered title on June 28. Rogers are printed here. an evening The author’s summary and a lecture bearing the above review by Professor C. The study of the physiology of the oyster has been undertaken with a two-fold purpose: to obtain de- finite information regarding the functions of this organism and to determine the factors that control its growth and propagation in the ocean. Ostrea virginica occurs along the Atlantic coast and in the Gulf of Mexico from the Gulf of! St. Lawrence to the mouth of the Rio Grande. It thrives under a great variety of climatic and hy- drographic conditions and in certain sections of the coast it grows in such abundance, forming banks or beds extending over several square miles, that it can be regarded as one of the most important organ- isms of the in-shore waters. The oyster plays a significant role in chemical cycles of several ele- ments which are accumulated in its body. It is known that be- sides Ca which the main constituent of the oyster shell, PeGugeZn, Pby and possibly is other metals can be stored in its’ tissues. Some of these elements are probably obtained from the food while others are directly absorbed from the surrounding water which is brought in by the action of the ciliated epithelium of the gills. For a study of these processes the understanding of the function of the gills is essential. The gills of the oyster have be- come mainly an organ of feeding although they still continue to function as an organ of respira- tion. ties of the gills consists in produc- ing a strong current of water which enters the gill cavity through so- called water pores and leaves it by the way of cloaca. Two new meth- ods (Science LXIII, p. 233 and J.| of Gen. Physiol. Vol. XI, p. 415) | have been developed whereby the in the gill cavity, and the work per- formed in producing the current can be measured. The rate of doing work, W, in erg/sec., in maintain- ing a constant current along the glass tube, which is introduced in- to the gill cavity and through which passes the outgoing stream, can be computed by applying Poiseulle’s formula where dp is drop of pressure be- tween the two marks, u the viscosity of water in poises, 1 is the length and D is the diameter of the tube in One of the principal activi-| | discharge in cms., and S the velocity at the| center of the tube in cms/sec. Since the work W cu.cms per second we arrive at the simple formula, W=2o luS?. Experiments carried out with a large number of oysters show that both the discharge of water through the gills and the rate of doing work are influenced by the temperature, but the relationship can not be des- cribed by the equation of Arrhenius. An explanation why speed of Mytilus cilia, fails in the case of the rate of doing work of the oyster gills is found in the dis- turbances in coordination of the beats. This complicates the effect of temperature on the frequency of the beat. A current of constant velocity is dependent on the main- tenance of a constant head pressure. The latter is maintained by the co- ordinated beats of the lateral cilia along the entire surface of the gill. Any disturbance in coordination causes a leakage through the water | pores, which in turn results in a drop of pressure and loss of efficiency in work. The timing mechanism is situated throughout the whole layer of ciliated epithelium and, as the author’s observations show, is af- fected by exposure to temperatures below 15° and above 25° C. The optimum temperature for the activity of the gill epithelium lies between 25° and 30° C. No current is produced at 5° and below, al- though the cilia continues to beat. Absence of current at low tempera- ture is due to the lack of coordina- tion of the ciliary motion along the surface of the gill. There exists considerable indi- : ‘vidual variation in the rate of flow velocity of the current, the amount of water discharged, the pressure | of water produced by different oysters. The maximum rate of flow for North Atlantic oysters is, 3.9 liters per hour at 25° C; for the Gulf of Mexico oysters it is nearly twice as much, 7.5 1. p. h. at 25° C. | The duration of feeding periods can be measured by recording time of opening and closing of the shells. The analysis of 132 daily records taken during the summer of 1927 showed that the oyster has a ten- dency to keep its shell open as long as possible. On the average the shells of North Atlantic oysters remain open for 17 hours and 7 minutes during every 24- hour period. =dp V, where V is| Arrhenius’ . . | equation, which has been found ap- | plicable in the case of the relative | Angelus prayers at 7 a. m., 100M, } pel], MRS. LILLIE GIVES BELL TOWER TO CHURCH (Continued There are to be two bells in the|old European custom. : : tower, and they are being cast by) bell, whic land. These bells will ring the f rom Page 1) The larger h is to be named Mendel lin honor of the scientist monk, is |to say, “I will teach you of life— jand of life eternal.” The other Pasteur, will then answer and 6 p. m. in accordance with the “Thanks be to God.” Courtesy of the Falmouth Enterprise. ARCHITECT'S DRAWING OF PROPOSED BELL TOWER The development of the gonads is dependent on feeding and there- fore is indirectly dependent on the temperature. It begins early in winter and progresses very actively in spring and during the first half of the summer. It has been found that the fullness of the gonad de- velopment, which can be estimated by measuring the thickness of the gonad layer, and the success or failure of spawning of oysters in Long Island Sound are correlated with the temperature in April and July. Successful years are those when the mean temperature during each of these months is above nor- mal while all the failures coincide with the years when the mean tem- perature was below normal. The discharge of the sex products is also affected by the temperature ; it does not occur at 20° or below, and therefore the temperature con- stitutes an important factor limit- ing the propagation and distribution of the organism. The reaction has been studied under controlled con- ditions in the laboratory. It has been found that the spawning of the female is a complex reaction consisting in the discharge of the eggs into the mantle cavity; in re- laxation of the adductor muscle and opening of the valves; in coming to- gether of the edges of the mantle on two opposite sides and closing the mantle cavity, except for a small opening and, finally, in rhythmical contractions of the adductor muscle and expulsion of eggs. The reac- tion can be induced by adding small amount of sperm to the surrounding water. The latent period of the re- action varies from 7 to 37 minutes and is independent of the amount of sperm added. The duration of the reaction varies from 7 to 51 minutes and is also independent of both the concentration of sperm and the duration of latent period. After the reaction is over the fe- male becomes insusceptible to the subsequent additions of sperm. The period of insusceptibility lasts from two to six days. The response of the female oyster to the addition of sperm is different from any other known case of chemical stimulation (alcohol, acids, adrenalin, etc.) ; the latent periods of the latter are of short durations lasting only a few seconds and are dependent on concentration.. It is suggested that the active principle of sperm suspension is absorbed by the tissues of the female and affects the nervous system through body fluids. Experiments with ultrafiltration show that the active principle does not pass through collodion mem- branes and is apparently located in the sperm. It is very unstable and is destroyed by heating the suspen- (Continued on Page 4) PAGE FOUR THE COLLECTING NET DR. GALTSOFF REPORTS HIS WORK IN OYSTER CULTURE (Continued from Page 3) 5 minutes at 46-47° C The spawning reaction of the male consists in a discharge ot sperm w hich is carried away by the outgoing stream of waters. The adductor muscle has no part in the reaction, the oyster keeping its’ shell wide open. Similar to the con- ditions existing in females, the males are stimulated by the presence of eggs in the water but they respond by an immediate discharge of sperm. The reaction can be repeated a num- ber of times without resulting in a loss of sensitivity. The active prin- sion for 1 tribution of the oyster and the | manner in which its northern limit | is determined accumulator ciple of egg suspension is soluble in sea water and can be separated from eggs by filtration. Mutual stimulation of the op- posite sexes by the discharge of their sex products is one of the factors controlling the propagation of the oyster in the ocean. al significance occurring in Echino- derms, Annelids and fishes, and is undoubtedly of great importance in the life of many marine organisms. REVIEW By Dr. C. G. ROGERS Professor of Comparative Physiology, Oberlin College The report by Dr. Paul S. Galt- soff on Friday evening, June 28, was an interesting presentation of an equa lly interesting subject. In spite of all the work that has been previously done upon the natural history of the oyster, Dr. Galtsoff is finding it possible to make valu- able contributions to our knowledge of the more intimate features of the daily life of this organism, and the reasons for some of ent successes and failures. In doing so, he is introducing us to new and_| re- | well conceived procedures in search, and is putting the study of oyster culture upon a really scienti- | fic basis. The beautiful simplicity of his technical attacks upon problem and the careful analyses of the data secured are outstanding features of his work. presents a very interesting combin- ation of physical (particularly hy- drodynamic), chemical and ematical methods and processes in the solution of a biological problem. The criticism that is sometimes made, that specialization in scienti- fic investigation leads to a loss of perspective of the problem, can not be made in this case. Dr. Galtsoff recognizes clearly that suc- cessful oyster culture involves a knowledge of the interactions the organism with its environment. He, therefore, proceeds to a study of the normal physiology of the feeding and reproductive processes of the oyster and, in the course of his lecture presents a number of important facts. After calling attention to the dis- its. appar- | the | His report | math- | of | This | phenomenon is apparently of gener-| by the temperature of the sea water, the speaker men- | of the oyster and depositor of the elements Ca, I, Cu, Zn, and Pb. There is reason to believe that in restricted areas this activity may assume such proportions as to affect slightly the chemical balance of the Such changes are known tioned the role as an sea water. to occur as the result of the selec- | tive activity of many other organ- isms, and result in the deposition in restricted areas of considerable ac- cumulations of material. Any at- tempt to cultivate oysters in waters in which there is an abnormal or unusual concentration of these ele-. ments might lead to interesting discoveries. A thorough study the role of the oyster in this regard would be a matter of much interest. It is a matter of interest to note that Dr. Galtsoff finds that the oyster feeds upon particulate organ- ic matter and not upon organic matter in solution in the sea water. In this he stands with Moore, Whitely, Dakin and others in their failure to confirm the work of ‘Piitter upon the nutrition of the | lower metazoan forms. If the oyster feeds upon plankton it fol- jows that successful oyster culture depends upon a continuous supply of plankton, and very likely upon some particular plankton forms. The oyster may, therefore, thrive only in locations where the pastur- age is good. It would certainly be of interest and importance to cor- relate good pasturage with the presence of particular plankton forms which may have the power to accumulate particular chemical ele- ments such as iodine or iron, ete. Up to date we have little evidence as to the particular plankton forms which best provide nutrition for the oyster, and are, therefore, wholly unprepared to assist nature in providing suitable diet in case of need. To suggest that it may be possible to determine the optimun physical, chemical and _ biological conditions for the growth of the oyster, and then make use of this information in rendering oyster culture more profitable or more beneficial for the human race seems like a large undertaking. Fully as remarkable undertakings have been accomplished. The correlation between “suc- cess” in oyster culture and “non- success” in years having higher- than-normal average temperatures for April-June, and lower-than- normal average temperatures for the same months, respectively, a more extended the relative food supplies in these periods, both as seems to call for investigation of | to amount and kind. Dr. Galtsoff’s — hydrodynamic study of the action of the gill cilia in maintaining water currents through and over the gills seemed very well conceived and accurately (Continued on Page 6) of) Edie, | People Who Buy SPENCER RESEARCE MICROSCOPES ARE NOT SUSCEPTIBLE TO BARGAIN APPEAL, THEY WANT QUALITY PRECISION DESIGN USABILITY Always, their great response is to that patrician element which sets fine things apart. AND SO SPENCER RESEARCH MICROSCOPES Nos. and 7H, 7CBH 14H, by Mc- First visioned Prof. ©. E. Clung and then created in their proudest trad i- tion and kept free from the barter- ings of the mar- ket place. WITHOUT SPECIAL INDUCEMENT, they have met a demand that has no parallel in Research Microscope history. There is now scarcely a college, university or research labora- tory in America that does not possess at least one of these fine microscopes. Whoever wants a research microscope wants the very latest and the best; they want a fork-type substage which admits every possible substage accessory; they want a fine adjustment for focusing the condenser because in recent years they have learned that fine focusing of objectives is not enough, it should be supplemented by fine focusing of the condenser; they want a highly corrected achromatic condenser; they want the advan- tage of ease and comfort on the eyes provided by the converg- ing binocular tubes; they want a combination stage-plain and mechanical (2 in one); they want a combined binocular and monocular body (2 in one) which avoids the necessity of changing from one tube to another when changing from bino- cular to monocular vision and vice versa; they may want a set of highly corrected apochromatic objectives, certainly the best achromatic obtainable. All these and many more advantageous features, many of them patented by us, are provided in Spencer Research Mic- roscopes and this explains why laboratory workers prefer them to any others. best be The Company that makes the research microscopes, should able likewise to excel in making laboratory and student microscopes, OUR EXHIBIT AT W CIOS HOLE WILL BE JULY 8 - 20 Spares ens Gane BUFFALO, N. Y. NEW YORK, BOSTON, CHICAGO, WASHINGTON. BRANCHES: SAN FRANCISCO, THE COLLECTING NET A History of the Library (Continued from Page 1) to Mrs. R. H. Richards, and to others for aid in connection with the library, it is probable that from the very first season there were volumes of journals and mono- graphs assigned a shelf in the upper sanctum or research laboratory ; whereas only reference books used by instructors and students were kept on the floor below. At any rate, we know that before the second season, a “small library” was partitioned off on the south- east side of the upper laboratory floor at the same time that “eight private rooms for investigators” were divided off on the north side. To Dr. Whitman, the library was regarded as essential to the ma- teralization of the “permanent staff of investigators” for whose organi- zation into a marine biological laboratory he eloquently pleaded in his address at the opening of the Laboratory in its first season. He said: “The ideal building should have extensive aquarium facilities, a comprehensive library, an audi- torium, a spacious general labora- tory for instruction, and a number of private rooms for investigation. Ample means should eventually be provided for the maintenance of serial and monographical publica- tions”. In his report of the first season he stressed in strong words this plea for help for a library: “A library is a necessity in such a laboratory, and it must be provided for in one way or another. Boston libraries are near enough to be of great service, but we cannot depend on them alone. In addition to text- books and standard works of re- ference, we must have as a mini- mum to begin with all the import- ant journals now printed in the four principal languages. It is most earnestly to be hoped that adequate means may be found to meet this all-important requisite”. This para- graph numbers third among five, in each of which he enumerated im- portant necessities for the next season. Dr. Whitman’s skilful presenta- tion of the pressing necessities brought fruitful results at once. Before the summer of 1889, the Library, a sunny corner with one window, was, according to the Announcement of 1889, “provided henceforth with not only the ordi- nary text-books, and works of reference, but also with the more important journals of zoology and botany and many of them in com- plete series’. The Trustees in their report elucidate: “The Library has grown into a very valuable collec- tion of books, chiefly long series of journals. This valuable addition to our equipment we owe principally! to Mrs. Glendower Evans’ liberality for which we make most grateful acknowledgement. She deposited with us one thousand dollars worth of biological works, which were selected by the committee of the Trustees especially for the Labora- tory. chased from the general funds of the Laboratory. sions have been made by gift. The details are given in the report of the Library’. A six-page report of the Library Committee followed and was signed by Dr. Charles S. Minot, Chairman; Professor W. T. Sedgwick and Professor C. O. Whitman. Even at that time efforts were made to secure the “largest possible series of biological jour- nals, and as many pamphlets as we can”. By the Fall of 1889, there were in the Library 343 volumes and 525 pamphlets arranged and catalogued. Nearly all this work was done without expense to the Laboratory”. It is impossible to resist giving a list of the journals that were at this time, the second year of the Laboratory, already started in cur- rent subscription, never to be dropped. There were, as far as one can be sure, twenty-two titles: Anatomischer Anzeiger Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Botamque Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Zoologie Annals of Botany Arbeiten aus den Zoologischen Instituten der Universitat Wien Archiv fur Anatomie und Phy- siologie Archw fur Mikroskopische Ana- tome Archives de Biologie Archives de Zoologie mentale et Generale Botanical Gazette Botanische Zeitung La Cellule Gegenbaurs Morphologisches Jahrbuch Jahrbucher fur wissenschaftliche Botanik : Jenaische Zeitschrift fur Natur- wissenschaft Just’s Botanischer Jahresbericht Mitteilungen aus der Zoologi- schen Station zu Neapel Quarterly Journal of Microsco- pical Science Zeitschrift fur Wissenschaftliche Mikroskopie Zeitschrift fur Wissenschaftliche Zoologie Zoologische Jahrbucher Zoologischer Jahresbericht It would be interesting to know whether or not Wilhelm Roux’ Archiv ‘fur Entwicklungsge- schichte was subscribed to at its inception in 1895. Certainly it was begun very soon, since the complete set was in the Library in 1913. That Roux’ Archiv was here practically at its beginning and the Zeitschrift fur Physikalische Chemie as early as 1920, is an interesting indication of the kind of work being done at the Laboratory. The precision with which the (Continued on Page 11) Experi- Other books have been pur-' Important acces- | Coming Soon A new second edition of aa Ay INGY. PRINCIPLES AND PROBLEMS BY EpmMuND W. SINNOTT Professor of Botany, Barnard College, Columbia University McGraw-Hill Publications in the Agricultural and Botanical Sciences One hundred and eighty-five colleges adopted the first edition of this “question-problem-discussion” text. The book was widely welcomed as an important forward step in the pres- entation of the essential facts which should find their place in an elementary botany course. In this new second edition the entire text has been care- fully rewritten and brought up to date. The text has been somewhat increased in length, but not markedly so. The number of illustrations has been increased consider- ably. The questions for thought and discussion have been thoroughly revised and some new ones included, although the total number has been slightly reduced. The reference problems have been considerably increased in number. The author says, “As before, the text is primarily adapted to one-semester courses, but I have used it this year in a full year’s course and have found plenty of material in it. I feel that it can readily be used both for shorter and longer courses, depending on the amount of time devoted to the questions and problems.” RECENT McGRAW-HILL BIOLOGICAL BOOKS Wardle—Problems of Applied Entomology 3y Rorert A. Warpte, Professor of Zoology, University of Manitoba, formerly Associate Professor of Entomology, Uni- versity of Minnesota and Lecturer in Economic Zoology, University of Manchester. 587 pages, 6x 9, 31 illustrations. $6.00 Graham—Principles of Forest Entomology By SamurLt A. Grauam, Associate Professor of Forest En- tomology, University of Michigan; Agent, U. S. Dept. of Agriculture, Bureau of Entomology. McGraw-Hill Publica- tions in the Zoological Sciences. 339 pages, 6x9, 149 illustrations. $3.50 Weldon—Economic Biology By Georce P. WeELpon, /nstructor in Biology, Entomology and Pomology, Chaffey Union High School and Junior College, Ontario, Calif. McGraw-Hill Vocational Texts. 457 pages, 5% x 8, 191 illustrations. $2.50 Fred and Waksman—Laboratory Manual of General Microbi- ology—with Special Reference to the Microorganisms of the Soil 3y Epwin B. Frep, Professor of Agricultural Bacteriology, University of Wisconsin, and Setman A. WaksMAN. ASso- ciate Professor of Soil Microbiology, Rutgers University. 145 pages, 514% x8, illustrated. $2.00 Metcalf and Flint — Destructive and Useful Insects — Their Habits and Control By C. L. Meteatr, Professor of Entomology, University of Illinois, and W. P. Frrnt, Chief Entomologist, Illinois State Natural History Survey. McGraw-Hill Publications in the Zoological Sciences. 918 pages, 6x 9, 561 illustrations. $7.50 Send for these new books on approval McGRAW-HILL BOOK CO., Inc. 370 SEVENTH AVENUE, NEW YORK PAGE FIVE -AGE SIX THE COLLECTING NET The Collecting Net | New Bedford Massachusetts Woods Hole A weekly publication concerned with the activities of the Marine Bio- ogical Laboratory and of Woods | Hole, Telephone Falmouth 1225 STAFF Ware Cattell] ........-..2-+2 Editor | Assistant Editors Annaleida S. Cattell Eugene DuBois} Contributing Editors Hulme Helen S. Morris Theodore Wyman Kathryn Business Manager Ilse Michaelis Shirley H. Gray—Printer New Bedford, Massachusetts EDITORIAL The first issue of THe COLLEct- inc Net made its appearance on July 21, 1926. The editorial page was opened with the following words: “IT was officially born on Monday, July 12, when the Executive Commit- tee of the Marine Biological Labor-| atory sanctioned the proposal for my | birth. It was not a case of artificial | activation for perfectly natural con- | ditions initiated my development. It was the actual need of an agent | within the institution to diseminate news among its workers and to co- ordinate the varied activities of the laboratory. “At this very early stage in my life I am naturally lacking in certain qualities. Unity, organization and differentiation have yet to be incor- porated into my amorpherous and plastic body. Having had a natural origin I may look forward to normal growth and development, and ever increasing usefulness. “But I am only an infant and must be carefully nurtured and encouraged, | My diet must be judiciously chosen so as to be easily digested and proper- ly appreciated. But give me some substantial food.” The reception of “the infant” was a cold one except among the} = = | students and some of the younger investigators. Not until last sea- son did Tue CoLtectinG Net meet with almost universal approval from the members of the laboratory. Without question every- one whose name appears in the directory will at least look over each | number of THE COLLECTING Ner. A magazine of the charac- ter of THE CoLLecTING NET can only approach perfection if all its readers lend it their hearty sup- port. Its excellence is directly proportional to the cooperation which they give; if it received no cooperation from any member of the laboratory our magazine could not exist. This year we will include more general news in our columns than we have done in other summers, and it is in this phase of our work | quet will be held on Friday, August ' gation plans to visit Toronto and that everyone can help. It has been often remarked that one of the most interesting parts of Science is its columns of “Scientific Notes and News”. There is no reason why an equally good department can not be initiated in THE CoL-) LtecTING Net. It would con- cern laboratory people and their friends; recording haps (and mis- haps!) ; (arrivals and departures yg appointments (and dismissals!) ; | births (and deaths!) ; promotions (and demotions!) ; weddings (and divorces!) Even though our readers are too reticent and modest con- cerning the things that happen to themselves, we hope they will con- sent to report things of interest about their friends. CONGRATULATIONS! Tue Cotitectinc Net extends its congratulations to: Professor Sergius Morgulis on July 6. Professor Robert P. Bigelow on July 10. Professor G. S. Dodds on July 11. because these days mark the anni- versaries of their births. PHYSIOLOGICAL CONGRESS _trolling TO VISIT WOODS HOLE The thirteenth International Physiological Congress, which pro- mises to be the largest ever held, will convene in Boston on August 19, At least thirty-five foreign countries will be represented, as well as practically every laboratory in this country. The delegates will number about six hundred, but since many of them will be accom- panied by their wives and children, the total party will probably number well over seven hundred. Most of those who are coming over from Europe will arrive on the S. S. Minnekhada, which has been chartered by Thomas Cook & Son. The scientific sessions will be held in Boston during the first five days after the date of the opening, and as a climax to the other features of entertainment there, a final ban- 23. The next day everybody will come to Woods Hole for a visit to the M. B. L. and a clam-bake. Then they will go to New York City, where they will spend six days in being entertained and in_ sight- seeing. Some members will then proceed to Philadelphia, Baltimore, and Washington, and a large dele- Montreal before sailing home from that latter city. While in America the Congress will be the guest of the American Federated Society of Experimental | Biology and Medicine. The visitors and their families will be housed in the dormitories of Harvard while they are attending the meet- ings there, and in the International House and other dormitories of Columbia University while they are in New York. OYSTER CULTURE (Continued from Page 4) done. The pressure determined, 4 mm. HO, is well in accord with that determined by Dr. Parker for one of the sponges. The amount of water passing through the water pores every hour seems large, even in the case of the North Atlantic oyster. Why nearly twice as much water should be pumped through the pores of the oyster from the Gulf of Mexico as through those of its northern relative calls for fur- ther study. Is it possible that some difference in the H’ ion concentra- tion, or in the amount of oxygen dissolved in the sea water, or in the concentration of food materials in the water may account for the great difference ? The roles played by temperature and by chemical secretions in con- spawning activities are extremely interesting--and not fully understood. It is certainly very important to be able to add_ the oyster to the list of animals whose spawning activities are at least in part under chemical control. Fur- ther experimentation to discover whether or not spawning may also be correlated with the lunar cycle, as is true in the case of some of the marine worms, and possibly in the case of some Echinoderms, may be worth while. The reviewer is very glad to re- cord his appreciation of the results thus far obtained by Dr. Galtsoff under the auspices of the United States Fish Commission, and to express the hope that the work may be continued to an even more fruit- ful ending. The scientific literature is in need of more reports of mono- graphic form in which there will be embodied well rounded accounts of such single forms as the one under consideration. CHORAL CLUB BEGINS ITS EVENING REHEARSALS f Try-outs Invited Hole Choral Club held its first rehearsal of the season on Tuesday, July 2, in the M. B. L. Club house. This is the third sum- mer that Mr. Ivan _ Gorokoff, former director of the choir of the Russian Cathedral in New York and at present director of Choral Music at Smith College, has con- ducted the singing. The rehearsals come every Tuesday and Friday evening at quarter past nine o'clock. The final concert will occur about the middle of August. The officers of the Choral Club are this year, President, Dr. D. J. Edwards; Secretary-Treasurer, Dr. Charles Packard; Librarian, Miss Margaret Sumwalt; Accompanist, Mrs. Selig Hecht. There are about forty members of the Club. Persons of Woods Hole, whether connected with the M. B. L. or not, are invited to see Mr. Gorokoff at the M. B. L. Club sometime between 7 and 9 p. m. next Monday or Tuesday evening. The music being sung this year is composed of English and Rus- sian folk songs, Russian church music, and some sixteenth century Latin religious music. ~The Woods M. B. L. MIXER ENJOYED BY LARGE AND GAY THRONG The first M. B. L. Mixer was held on the evening of Saturday, June 29, in the M. B. L. Club house. Several hundred happy members and their families at- tended, and judging from the “badges” they wore, many colleges and universit-es in the country were represented. The Mixer began at eight thirty o'clock, and hand shaking, intro- ducing, reminiscing, and eating continued until ten. Delicious ice- cream, cakes, and punch were served in the midst and hazard of the milling crowd, and by the time dancing began, everyone was “thoroughly mixed and served warm”, as a cooking recipe might say. At ten o'clock, Mr. Collins’ five piece orchestra struck up with (the latest dance tunes and the mix- ing continued in a more rhythmic form until midnight. The success of the Mixer was in part due to the clever posters ad- vertising it. The Club feels a deep ‘gratitude to its young artists, Misses Mollie Wilson, Francina Snyder, Hester A. Bradbury, Grace Apgar, and Mr. A. TérLouw. Professor G. H. Parker, director of the Harvard Zoological Labora- tory, has been elected a correspond- ing member of the Biological Society of Paris. RUSSIAN MOTION PICTURES COMING THe CorLectinc Net has se- cured a series of three Russian pic- tures from the Amkino Corporation in New York. These unusual movies are to be shown for the ben- efit of THe Coriectinc Net Scholarship Fund. The tentative date of Thursday, July 18, has been chosen for the showing of one of the Russian pic- tures produced by Eisenstein. The picture selected will probably be “Ten Days That Shook the World,” which is supposed to be dis- tinguished for its fine photography. Currents in the Hole At the following hours the current in the hole turns to run from Buz- zards Bay to Vineyard Sound: A.M. P.M. nD vaee OG occ scesccaten 4:15 ., 4:26 hi: “FATS ane Rare, 5:10 5:21 URE Phd alter eee ery 6:04 6:15 MUU ae OG ve caccctecenee ed 6:55 7:10 anuuliye LOth: faces tears 7:48 8:12 enlye plelit hiie, <2 tseemeee 8:42 9:10 July 12th 9:36 10:10 ANWUGZ WSa eT SS epeeohee scone 10:33 11:05 In each case the current changes six hours later and runs from the Sound to the Bay. It must be remem- bered that the schedule printed above is dependent upon the wind. Pro- longed winds sometimes cause the turning of the current to occur a half an hour earlier or later than the times given above. THE COLLECTING NET PAGE SEVEN The A. B. C. of Woods Hole for 1929 ALL SCHEDULES SET TO DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME—BOLD TYPE INDICATES P. M. BOAT SCHEDULE New Bedford, Martha’s Vineyard, and Nantucket Steamboat Line Summer Schedule Daily Sunday Leave Daily Daily Daily Daily Daily Ex. Sun. Only New Bedford ....-- 7.00 9.30 12.05 2.30 5.00 7.30 8.00 Woods Hole ..... 8.20 10.50 1.20 3.50 6.20 8.50 9.20 Oakes BLUTES =... 9.10 11.40 2.10 4.40 7.05 Due Vineyard Haven 9.40 10.10 Nantucket 11.30 2.00 4.30 7.00 9.30 Daily Sunday Leave Daily Daily Daily Daily Ex.Sun. Only Daily Nantucket 7.00 9.30 2.00 2.30 3.00 5.00 Vineyard Haven 6.10 @als Bluris 3.0... 9.00 11.30 2.00 4.30 5.00 7.10 Wioodssrole ...... 6.55 9.50 12.20 2.50 5.20 5.00 7.50 Due New Bedford ..... 8.20 11.30 2.00 4.30 7.00 7.30 9.30 TRAIN SCHEDULE New York, New Haven, and Hartford Railroad Woods Hole to Boston—Week Days WYOOUSHIELOUG! ceyetejeusept feasts = = *7.03 (ails) 10.20 12.55 3.23 3.00 PAPEUEIMO NIT I 2. sales prerels ie) =#= ==. 2,0 7.09 7.22 10.28 1.02 3.30 6.02 CIS COMM ral efeleieieleiia\ Seshe ene. se.) sii 8.56 9.10 12.30 2.00 6.00 8.00 Woods Hole to Boston—Sundays Boston to Woods Hole—Saturdays Woods Hole 6.25 8.20 £9.30] Boston: -coscner-eenaee 1.06 8.30 Falmouth ...... 6.32 8.27 9.37 | Falmouth ......... 3.08 10.52 IBOSEOM) ci. es sects 8.35 10.25 11.43) Woods Hole ....... 3.15 11,00 Boston to Woods Hole—Week Days INGO Sc ne Bono SploUroS 7.00 *8.25 1.25 4.03 4.25 IRIEULIMNOMUCT ee osreiee wiels a> = 9.52 10.28 3.30 6.02 6.47 Wioods) Hole ....s.2.... 10.00 10.35 3.37 6.09 6.55 Boston to Woods Hole—Sundays—See * above. The “Cape Codder” (Sleeping Cars Only) Fridays Only Sundays Only ¢ Mewewconk (G. GC. T:)i-....-5. 11°20) |Woods) Holel =. eee eee 9.30 MZDUMRMSECECL (ee scien see ee ASO) | Walla ogG he eee octane eee 9.37 PRFEPUITMONUDEN altel oh = s\ohe:le- ete cee-ae) Trot) |e DG be SELCC bs teeerrcsnrneletrsienetete 5.19 UO OOS ELOUCS foie cies wer sye el vs 2 0. G45) | New York (CGC) eeeuensrars 5.30 * Mondays Only. +t Runs Mon. Sept. 2 instead of Sun, Sept. 1. *Includes Sunday. WOODS HOLE BUS LINE Woods Hole—Falmouth—Falmouth Heights 2.55 4.10 5.25 3.10 4.25 5.40 3.20 4.35 5.50 3.20 4.40 5.50 3.30 4.50 6.00 3.45 5.05 6.15 C) 8) 10.10 10.20 Ly. Woods Hole Due Falmouth Due Fal. Hts. Ly. Fal. Hts. Ly. Falmouth Due Woods Hole 8.30 8.45 8.55 9.00 Orb 9.30 11.15 | 1.40 11.30 | 11.40 | 10.20 11.40 | 10.30 11.50 | 10.45 12.05 | 1.55 2.05 2.10 2.20 2.35 11.00 11.15 9.00 9.15 Leave Falmouth 10.00, Due Woods Hole 10.15, Ex. Bus leaves Woods Hole at 8.05 p.m. Tuesday, Thursday, Saturday evenings for “University Players’ at Silver Beach. : Saturday anq Sunday. BUS SERVICE New England Transportation Co. Woods Hole—Falmouth—Hyannis Week Days Sundays WOOGIE) ARIONGS Wo pe eacton clarke 12.30 5.30 12.30 6.00 IDEN kena, «ois tao cao OC sto 12,40 5.40 12.40 6.10 IRVEWSTOVEY 5.6 Aig pSckO Ree RO ENE NERS 2.00 6.00 2.00 7.40 Hyannis—Falmouth—Woods Hole TE WEG © colo Gane Olemeriee a 9.15 2.10 9.15 4.30 LENNON) cpa ae MOE AD e 10.30 3.25 10.30 5.45 WVOOGSMELOLC sm erecms mmimjes 10.45 3.40 10.45 6.00 NOTE:—No passengers accepted for the short trips between ‘Woods Hole and Falmouth between Falmouth and Woods Hole. RELIGIOUS SERVICES Church of the Messiah ( Episcopal ) Communion Services 5 Heh0) Ay sane 11.00 a.m. 7.30 p.m. First Congregational Church Services 11.00 a.m, 7.30 p.m. Methodist Episcopal Church Services 10.30 a.m. 7.30 p.m. Thurs. Prayer Meeting. .8.00 p. m. St. Joseph’s Roman Catholic Church 8.00 a.m. 9.30 a.m. Masses TELEGRAPH OFFICE HOURS Week Days 7.30 a.m. to 10.00 p.m. Sundays 10.00 a.m. to 12.00 noon. 5.00 p.m. to 7.00 p.m. POST OFFICE HOURS Mails Due 10.00 a. m 3.37 p.m. and 6.55 p.m. Mails Close 6.45a.m 9.50a.m., and 5.25 p, m. Office Hours 7.00 a.m. to 7.50 p.m. No Mails on Sunday. LIBRARY HOURS Wednesdays and Saturdays 3.00 p.m. to 5.00 p.m. 7.00 p.m. to 9.00 p. m. TIME OF LOW TIDE AT FISH COMMISSION WHARF A.M. P.M. A.M. P.M Ss. July 6 2.52 2.44 W. Aug. 14 10.29 a Sun 2 3.44 3.39 nas 25 12.47 12.05 M. , 8 4.35 4.34 F. ala 1.33 12.40 ris 9 5.25 5.28 S. ALT 2.05 1.26 Ww. 10 6.14 6.25 Sun el SI 2.32 2.06 Th. 11 7.02 7.23 M. ote) 2.57 2.46 F. Tale 7.52 8.27 ny DX) S24) 38 Ss. TS 8.40 9.42 w. gy 22" 3.54 4.01 Sun Bie gale 9.33 11.07 Th. ree 4.27 4.41 M. 9 alls) 10.28 sae: F. 2's 5.01 5.23 Te omeltG 12.17 12.01 Ss. ” 94 5.39 6.06 Ww. 17 1.10 12.16 Sun px 6.17 6.54 Th. us ald ier ale M. ” 96 7.02 7.48 F. De AI) 2.28 1.48 my 7 7.54 8.49 Ss. 20) Nth LP Ww. see nD'8 8.53 10.01 Sun Wi Pyal 3.24 3.00 Ths 1 229) HOLOZ: | Mesa M. "22 8.53 3.39 F, ees) ilalpal’y aon 1) aes) 4.23 4.17 S. 14 18h Des Gresgtesih Ww. ee: 4.56 4.58 Sun, Sept. 1 1.36 2.20 Th. Pe in 5.32 5.41 M. ” 2 2.26 2.33 F. #796 6.09. 6.27 T. Dh eh} 3.10 3.24 S) 27 6.49 7.16 Ww. my 4 3.49 4.11 Sun 28 epee Beall “lo : 5 4.29 4.55 M. 29 EEL) 11} F. Dts 5.05. 5.37 TT. OD 9.20 10.21 Ss. Ds i 5.41 6.19 Ww. eB yiL NGS, TAS) Sun Wess 6.17 7.00 mhy Aue el ILA soe M. ” 9 6.58 7.45 F. 2 12.43 12.35 qT. 110 14d) Read SH 8 1.45 1.38 Ww. (De walgt 8.32 9.54 Sun 2 ae 2.40 2.36 Th. ene) 9:37) eee M. 5 3.29 3.32 ink Dae} 12.11 12.05 ‘aN 6 4.16 4.24 Ss. ele! 1.00 12.17 Ww. ; i 5.00 5.15 Sun a5 1.30 1.07 ih def 5.42 6.04 M. Pins if} 1.54 1.46 F. 9 6.24 6.54 7. al 7) 2.20 2.25 Sf ” 10 RAO Game Te Ag Ww. a BIE} 2.48 3.03 Sun de ali 7.46 8.43 Th. 23 Er) 3:20mmeES 22 M. Bs ale: 8.32 9.54 F. 2.0) 3.53 4.21 st Hite 9.25 11.39 Ss. ER 4.29 5.03 For subtract low tide at Uncatena Island and the north side of Woods Hole 10 minutes. PAGE EIGHT THE COLLECTING NET DIRECTORY FOR 1929 Abbreviations Botany Building ......--+++++: Bot. Brick Building ...-....-+-+s+++- Sr. Mecture Hall). ..e2.0= + eres ss L. Old Main Building ....----+---+ O. M. Rockefeller Building ......--- Rock. Other abbreviations are similar to those incorporated in “American Men of Science.” THE STAFF Allen. C. E., prof, bot., Wisconsin. Amberson, W. R., asst. prof. phys., Pennsylvania. Bennitt, R., assoc. prof. zool., Mis- souri. Bissonnette, T. H., prof. biol., Trinity. Bradley. H. C., prof. phys. chem., Wisconsin. Brooks, S. C.. prof. zool., California. Calkins, G. N., prof. protozool., Co- lumbia. Cohn, E. J assoc. prof. physical chem., Harvard. Cole. E. €., assoc. prof. biol., Williams. Conklin, E. G., prof. zool., Princeton. Dawson, J. A., instr. zool., Harvard. Duggar, B. M., prof. bot., Wisconsin. Fenn, W, O., prof. phys., Rochester. Garrey, W. E., prof. phys., Vanderbilt Med. Grant, Madeleine P., asst. prof. zool., Mt. Holyoke. Grave. B. H.. prof. biol. DePauw. Grave, C.. prof. zool., Washington. Goodrich. H. B., prof. biol., Wesleyan. (absent) Harvey, E. N., prof. phys., Princeton. Haywood, Charlotte, asst. prof. phys., Vassar. Hecht, S.. prof. biophysics, Columbia. Hoadley. L., asst. prof. zool., Harvard. Jacobs, M. H., prof. gen. phys., Penn- sylvania. Jennings, H. S., prof. zool., Hopkins. Lewis, I. F.. prof. biol., Virginia. Lillie, F. R., prof. emb., Chicago. Lillie, R. S.. prof. gen. phys., Chicago. McClung, C. E., prof. zool., Pennsyl- vania. MacDougall, Mary S., prof. zool., Agnes Scott. Martin, E. A., asst. prof. zool., Col. City OLN] Li. Mast, S. O., prof. zool., Hopkins. Mathews, A. P., prof. biochem., Cin- cinnati. Michaelis, L., mem. Rockefeller Inst. Morgan, T. H., dir. biol. lab., Cal. Inst. Tech. Packard, C., asst. prof. zool., Colum- bia. Parker, G. H., prof. zool., Harvard. Plough, H. H., prof. biol., Amherst. Poole, J. P., prof. evolution. Dart- mouth. Poulton, Ethel M., fel. bot., Yale. Redfield, A. C., asst. prof. phys., Har- vard. Robbins, W. J., prof. bot., Missouri. Rogers, C. G., prof. comp. phys., Oberlin. Severinghaus, A. E., inst. zool., Co- lumbia. Taylor, W. R., prof. bot., Pennsyl- vania. Unger, W. B., asst. prof. zool., Dart-"| mouth. Wilson, E. B., prof. zool., Columbia, Woodruff, L. L., prof., protozool., Yale INVESTIGATORS Addison, W. H. F., prof. hist. and emb., Pennsylvania Med. Br. 220. Amberson, W. R., asst. prof. Pennsylvania Med. Br, 309. Armstrong, P. B., instr. anat., Cornell phys., Med. Br. 318. Bailey, Sarah W., grad. Radcliffe. O. M. Base. Baron, A. L., asst. biol., New York. Br. 3. Barron, EB. Ss. G., instr. med., Hopkins Med. Br. 313. Barth, L. S., grad. Chicago, Br. 217a. te fs Belar, K. L, Privatdozent zool., Kaiser- Wilhelm Inst. of Biology, Berlin. Br. 222. Benkert, J. M., grad. asst. Zool., Pittsburg. Rock. 7. Biddle, R. L.. fel. biol., Cal. Inst. Tech. Br. 315. Bigelow, R. P., prof. zool., Mass. Inst. Tech. Br. 344. Blanchard, K. C., asst. prof, biochem., New York. Br. 341. Blumenthal, R., grad. phys., Pennsyl- vania. Br. 217k. Bostian, C. H., grad.-asst. zool., Pitts- burg, Rock. 2. Bostian, Neita C., res. asst. zool., Pittsburg. Rock. 7. Bowen, R. H., prof. zool., Columbia. Br. 305. Bowling, Rachel, grad. asst. zool., Co- lumbia. Br, 314. Bowman, P. W., instr. Washington. Bot. Breitenbecker, J. K., Gill. L. 25. Bridges, C. B., res. Inst, Tech. Br. 324. Brinley, F. J., prof. Creek. Br. 217]. Brooks, C. M., grad. asst. zool., Prince- ton. Br. 332. Brooks, Matilda M., California. Br. 335. bot., lect. zool., Mc- asst. zool., Cal. phys., Battle res, assoc, biol., Buck, Louise H., res. asst. zool., Co- lumbia. Br. 305. Budington, R, A., prof. zool., Oberlin. Bri ZB Buisset, S., fel. phys., Pennsylvania. lsh abality Butcher, E, O., asst. prof. biol., Hamil- ton. L, 30. Butler, E. G., asst. prof. biol., Prince- ton. L. 29. Calkins, G. N., prof. protozool. Colum. are 2a. Carmichael, E. B., Alabama, O, M. 40. Carothers, E. Eleanor, lect . zool., Pennsylvania. Br. 221. Carroll, P. L., instr. biol., St. Louis. Br. 2. Carson, Rachel L., Penn. Col. Women, O. M. Base. Cashdollar, Helen, grad, zool., Pitts- burg. Rock, 7. Cattell, M., asst. prof. phys., Cornell Med. Br. 214. Cattell, W., res. fel. biophysics, Memo- rial Hosp. (N. Y.) Br. 128. Charles, D. R., grad. asst. zool., Pitts- burg. Rock. 7. Cheney, R. H., asst. prof. biol., New Wiork? Br. 10:2. Chesley, L. C., fel. zool., Duke. O. M. Base. Chidester, F. E., prof. zool., West Virginia. O. M. 44. Chouke, K, S., instr. anat., Colorado Med. Br. 122C. Christie, J. R., assoc. nematologist, U. S. Dept. Agr. Rock. 3. Clark, E. R., prof. anat., Pennsylvania. je ergy ths Ry fs Cline, Elsie, Br. Clowes, G. H. 127. A., dir. Lilly Res. Labs. Br. 328. Cobb, N. A., principal nematologist, U. S. Dept. Agr. Rock. 3. Coe, W. R., prof. biol., Yale. Br. 323. Coldwater, K., instr. zool., Missouri. Br. 335. Comegys. Margaret B., asst. prof. zool., Long Island. Br, 217n. Conklin, E. G., prof. biol., Princeton. Br.* 332. Copeland, M., prof. biol, Bowdoin. Br. 334. Cowdry, E. V., prof. cytol., Washing- Br. 223. Crabb, E. D., instr. zool., Pennsyl- vania. (Departed June 26.) Curtis Mary F., grad. zool., Yale. 217d. Curtis, W. C., prof. zool., Missouri. Br. 335. ton. ar. George Dailey, Mary E., res. asst. Harvard, Bice OT. Davis, E. F., Nat. Res. fel., Hopkins. Bot. 5, Davis, Fanny F. S., botany, Balti- more. Bot. 5. Deitrick, J. E., grad., Princeton. Chem. Dobzbansky, T., Int. Ed. Board fel. Br. 333. Dodds, G. S., prof. hist. and emb., West Virginia Med. O. M. 44. Dolley, Jr., W. L., prof. biol., Buffalo. Br. 339. Donaldson, H. H., mem., Wistar Inst. Br. 115. Draper, Jr., J. W., grad. Cornell Med. 3r. 214. Edwards, D. J... assoc. prof. phys., Cornell Med. Br. 214. Fisenbrandt, W. H., res. asst. phys., Maryland Med. Br. 122D. Ehrlich, W., stud., Washington Med. Bra 224: Failla, G., physicist, Memorial Hosp. GN. ¥.) Br. 123. Faure-Fremiet, F., prof. comp. emb., Collége de France. Br. 114. Fraser, D. A., asst. hist., Pennsylvania Med. Br. 220. Frew, Priscilla E., instr. biol., New York. Br. 3. Fry. H. J., assoc. prof. biol., New York. O. M. Base. Garrey, W. E., prof. phys., Vanderbilt Med. Br. 215. Gelfan, S., res. fel. phys., Chicago. Br. 328. Genther, Ida T.. asst. path., Wash- ington Med. Br. 122. Glaser, O. C., prof. biol. Amherst. Br. 204. Godrich, J., technician, New York. Goldfarb, A. J., prof. zool., Col. City On UNeeY. 1.234: Grannis, F. C., prof. biol., Memorial (Tenn.) Br. 217b. Graubard, M, A., asst. zool., Columbia, Br. 314. Grave, B. H., prof. zool., Depauw. Br. 234. Lincoln Green, Arda A., Nat. Res. fel. med., Harvard Med. Br. 108. Greene, E. C., fel. anat., Syracuse Med. Br. 1 Greene, W. F., assoc. prof. anat., Syra- cuse Med. Br. 115. Grodzinski, Z., prof. zool., Krakow (Poland). Br. 111. Grundfest, H., fel. phys. Columbia Br. 231. Harnly, Marie L., res asst., Carnegie Inst. Br. 321. Hartline, H. K., Nat. Res. fel., Hop- kins. Br. 229. Harvey, Ethel B., instr. zool., New York. Br. Liles Hausman, Sibyl A., asst. zool., Welles- ley. Br. 217m. Haywood, Charlotte, asst. prof. phys., Vassar. O. M. 6. Hecht, S., prof. biophysics, Columbia. Br. 230. Heilbrunn, L. V., res worker, New York. Br. 330. Henderson, Jean 1T., asst. biol., New York. Brie: Hetherington, W. A., fel. zool., Cal. Inst. Tech. Br. 315. Hibbard, Hope, asst. prof. zool., Oberlin. Br. 218, Hill, S. E., Nat. Res. fel., Princeton. Br. 116. Hinrichs, Marie A., res. assoc. phys., Chicago. Br, 336. Hiyeda, K., asst, prof. path., Man- churia Med. Br. 315. Hoadley, L., asst. prof. zool., Harvard. Br. 210. Holmes, Gladys E., instr. zool., West- ern Col. Women. Rock. Hook, Sabra J., asst, zool., 3r. 314. Barnard, Howard, F. H., asst. prof. phys., Co- lumbia Med, Library. Howe, H. E., editor: Ind. and Eng. Chem. Br. 203. Hiuettner, A. F., assoc. prof. zool., New York. Br. 1. Inman, O. L., prof. biol., Antioch, Br. 339. Irwin, Marian, assoc. feller Inst. Br. 207. Jacobs, M, H., prof. gen. phys., Penn- sylvania. Br. 102. Jennison, M. W., asst. Inst. Tech. Br. 344. Johlin, J. M., Assoc. prof., biochem., Vanderbilt Med. Br. 342. Johnston, Janet L., demonstrator biol, ‘ Brown. Rock. Keil, Elsa M., asst. biol., Brown. Rock. 6. Keltch, Anna K., asst., Eli Lilly Res, phys., Rocke- biol., Mass. Labs. Br. 319. Keosian, J., asst. biol. New York. Br. 106. Kerr, T., asst. biol., New York. Br. 3. Kindred, J. E., assoc. prof. hist. and emb., Virginia. Br. 329. Kinney, Elizabeth T., grad. zool., Co- lumbia. O. M. Base. Knowlton, F. P., prof. phys., Syracuse Med. Br. 226. Knower, H. McE., prof. anat., Ala- bama. Br, 234. Lange, Mathilde M., prof. zool., Whea- ton. OF Mint Lillie, F. R., prof. zool., Chicage. Br 22k Lillie, R. S., prof. phys., Chicago. Br. 326. Loeb, L., prof. path., Washington Med. Br. 301. Looper, J. B., assoc. prof. hist. and emb., Mississippi. L. 31. Lorberblatt, I., stud., Washington Med. Br. 1122. Lucké, B., assoc. prof, path, Penn- sylvania. Br, 310. Lynch, Ruth S., instr. zool., Hopkins. Br. 127. McCardle, R. C., Instr. phys., Temple, Rock 6, McClung, C. E., prof. zool., Pennsyl- vania. Br. 219. McCrady, E., grad. asst. zool., Pitts- burg. Rock. McCutcheon, M., asst. prof. path., Pennsylvania. Br, 310. McGoun, Jr., R. C., instr. biol., Am- herst. Br. 125. - Macklin, C. C., prof, anat., Western Ontario. L. 28. McWilliams, Thelma L., asst. biol., Wisconsin. Bot. Marsland, D, A., asst. prof. biol., New York sr. 106. Martin, E. A., asst. prof. biol., Col. City of N. Y. O. M. 28. Mavor, J. W., prof. biol., Union. Br. 343. Menkin, V., Nat. Res. fel., Pennsyl- vania. O. M. 34. Metz, C. W., mem., Carnegie Inst. (Cold Spring Harbor) Jr. Michaelis, L., mem., Rockefeller Inst. Br. 313. Miller, Evelyn H., grad. phys., Penn- 9 sylvania. Br. 110. Mills, C. A., assoc. prof, int. med., Cincinnati Med. Br. 110. Monosmith, Helen, res. asst. Carnegie Inst. (Cold Spring Harbor) Br. 9. Moore, Imogene, grad. zool., Yale. Br. 217e, Morgan, T. H., prof. biol., Cal. Inst. Tech. Br, 320. Morgulis, S., prof. biochem., Nebraska. Med. Br, 233. Morris, Helen S., grad. bot., Colum- bia. Bot. Murray, Margaret R., assoc. prof, phys., Florida State. Br. 336. Nabrit, S. M., prof. biol., Morehouse (Ga.) L. 33. Nonidez, J. F., asst. prof. anat., Cor- nell Med. Br. 317. q THE COLLECTING NET PAGE NINE Nordmann, M., Cologne, Br. 315. Packard, C., asst. prof. zool., Colum- bia. O. M. 2. Parker, G. H., prof. zool., Harvard. Br. 213. Parks, Elizabeth K., grad. zool., Ober- lin. Br. 217f. Parpart, A. K., grad. phys., Pennsyl- vania. Br. 205. Parpart, Ethel R., technician, path., Pennsylvania. Chem. Payne, Nellie M., Biol. Abstracts, Pennsylvania. Br. 217g. Phillips, P. L., asst. instr. anat., Cor- nell Med. Br. 318. Plough, H, H., prof. biol., Amherst. Br 125. Plowe, Janet Q., fel. bot., Pennsyl- vania. Bot. Pollister, A. W., instr. zool., Colum- bia. L. 26. Pond, S. E., asst. prof. phys., Penn- sylvania Med. Poole, J. P., prof. evolution, Dart- mouth. Bot. Potter, T. S., fel. phys., Chicago. Br. 217c¢. Poulton, Ethel M., fel. bot., Yale. Bot. Powsner, L., grad. phys., Harvard. Br. 110. Ratzlafi, A. K., asst. instr. anat., Kansas. O. M. 33. Redfield, Helen, asst. biol., New York. Br. 3. Rehberg. P. B., asst. phys., Copen- hagen. Br. 122B. de Rényi, G. St., assoc. prof. anat., Pennsylvania Med. Br. 117. Rezikoff, P., instr. med., Cornell Med. Br. 340. Richards, O. W., asst. prof. biol., Clark. Chem. Robert, Nan L., grad. zool., Columbia. Br. 314. Rogers, C. G., prof. comp. phys., Oberlin. Br. 218. Root, W. S., asst. instr. phys., Penn- sylvania Med. Br. 309. Rowlee. S., asst. prof. biol., Elmira. Bot. Rugh, R., asst. zool., Columbia. Br. 314. Sanders. Rosaltha, res. asst., Yale. Br. 323. Schauffler, W. G., physician, Princeton Br. 332. Schmuck, M. Louise, res. asst. biol., Carnegie Inst. (Cold Spring Harbor) Teags )h Schultz, J., Nat Res. fel. zool., Co- lumbia. Br. 233. Schumann, Margaret, technician hist., Kansas. L, 24. Schwind, J. L., instr. anat., Cornell Med. Br. 317. Scott. G. H.; asst. prof. biol., Wash- ington Med. Br. 223. Sears, Mary, grad. zool., Br. 217h. Sen, B., dir., Vivekananda Lab., Cal- Guitar. lela: Shull, A. F., prof, zool., Michigan. Br. 225. Radcliffe. Shumway. W., prof. zool., Illinois. O. M. 45. Sichel, F. J., asst. biol., New York. Br 109: Smith, Helen B., grad. zool., Hopkins. Br. 127. Smith. Mary D., asst. science, Toronto. Br. 123. Smith, W. A., stud. Pennsylvania Med., Br. 205. Snyder. C. D., prof. expt. phys., Hop- kins. -O. M. 5. Sokoloff, B., prof. expt. med., Prague, Br. 327. Snell, G. D., Rock, 2. Speidel, C. C.. assoc. prof. anat., Vir- ginia. Br. 329. Steinbach, H. D., dem. phys., Brown. O. M. 46. Steinhardt, J.. instr. biophysics, lumbia. O, M. darkroom, Stewart, Dorothy R., asst. prof. biol., Skidmore. Br. 111. Stone, R., instr. zool., 335. Strong, O. S., prof, neur. and neuro- hist., Columbia. Chem. household grad. zool., Harvard. Co- Missouri. Br. Stunkard, H. W., New York. Br. 232. Sturtevant, A. H., prof. genetics, Cal. Inst. Tech. Br. 333. Sumwalt, Margaret, assoc, phys., Women’s Med. (Penn.) Br. 304. Swett, F. H., assoc. prof. anat., Van- derbilt Med. Br. 342. Taylor, I. R., instr. phys., Brown. O. prof. biol., M. 46. Taylor, W. R., prof. bot., Pennsyl- vania. Bot. Ter Louw, A., grad. zool., Hopkins, 1E5 05. Ms Te Winkel, Lois E., asst. zool., Bar- nard. Br. 314. Thompson, G, P., instr. zool., Mary- land. Br. 122B. Tithebaum, instr. emb., Cal. Inst. Tech. Br. 315. Torvik, Magnhild M., grad. asst. zool., Pittsburg. Rock, 2. Turner, A. H., prof. phys., Mt. Hol- yoke. Br. 306, Uhlenhuth, E., assoc. prof. anat., Maryland Med. Br. 122D. Unger, W. B., asst. prof. zool., Dart- mouth, O. M. Van Slyke, E., instr. zool., Rock. 7. Wallace, Edith M., asst. genetics. Cal. Inst. Tech. Br. 321. 22 Pittsburg. Wang, Chi C., dir. chem., Nelson Morris Mem. Ins. (Chicago) Br. 110. Warren, H. .C., prof. psychology, Princeton. Br. 303. Waterman, A. J., phys., Oberlin. Whiting, Anna R., prof. biol., Penn. Col. Women. O, M. 43. Whiting, P. W., assoc. prof. zool., Pittsburg. O, M. 43. Willey, C, H., instr. biol., New York. ar. 232. Williams, S. C., instr. anat., Penn- sylvania Med. Br. 111. Wilson, E. B., prof. zool., Columbia. Br. 322. Winterstein, H., dir. Phys. Inst., Bres- lau. Br. 206. Wolf, E. A., asst. burg. Rock 7. Woodruff, L. L., prof. protozool., Yale. Br. 323, Woods, F. H., instr. zool., Wisconsin. Br. 335. Wormall, ow just as fast as biology grows, and I am of the opinion that noth- rg short of it could ever adequately represent a national centre of in- struction and research in biology. Vast as the scheme is, at least in its possibilities, it is a true germ, all the orincipal parts of which could be realized in respectable beginnings in a very few years and at no enor- mous expense. With scarcely any- ‘thing beyond our hands to work with, we have already succeeded in getting zoology and botany well started at Woods Hole, and phy- siology is ready to follow. If now experimental biology could be started, even in a modest way, it would add immensely to the general attractions of our work, for it would open a field which is com- paratively new and of rapidly grow- ing importance. There are so many things now called “experimental,” that I must explain what I have in mind sufficiently to make the general purpose intelligible. It is not that experimental embry- ology redundantly described as “de- velopmental mechanics’ which is row in vogue; not laboratory phy- siology, even in its wider applica- tion to animals; not egg-shaking, heteromorphism, heliotropism, and the like——not any of these things, but experimental natural history, or biology, in its more general and comprehensive sense. It is not the natural history of the tourist or the museum collector or the systematist, but the modern natural history, for which Darwin laid the foundation, and which Semper, Romanes, Var- igny, Weismann, Golton, Lloyd Morgan, and others have advocated and practised to the extent of the meager means at their command. The plan which I should propose, however, has not, so far as I am aware, been definitely formulated by any one, although some of its features, were indicated several years ago when I proposed such a station in connection with the Uni- versity of Chicago. The essentials of the plan were sketched as fol- lows: “Experimental biology represents not only an extension of physiologi- cal inquiry into all provinces of life, but also the application of its (Continued on Page 11) THE COLLECTING Some of the Functions and Features of a Biological Station (Continued from Page 10) methods to morphological problems ; in short, it covers the whole field in which physiology and morphol- ogy can work best hand in hand “A lake biological station, equip- ped for experimental work, would mark a new departure for which science is now ripe. Such a station hos nowhere been provided, but its need has been felt and acknowledged by the foremost biologists of today. There are no problems in the whole range of biology of higher scientific interest or deeper practical import to humanity than those which centre in variation and heredity. For the solution of these problems and a thousand others that turn upon them, facilities for long-continued experimental study, under con- ditions that adimit of perfect control, must be provided. Such facilities imply first of all material for study, and that nature here supplies in rich abundance. Then a convenient ob- servatory with a scientific staff is required. In addition,—and this all- important—there should be not only aquaria and plenty of running water, but also a number of ponds with a continuous supply of water, so arranged that the forms under observation could be bred and reared in isolation when necessary. Final- ly there should be room for keeping land animals and plants under favor- able conditions for cultivation and study. A station with such facili- ties as have been briefly indicated would furnish ideal conditions for the prosecution of research in nearly every department of biology, and especially in embryology and physiology.” If such a station could be de- veloped in immediate connection with the plant already under way at ‘Woods Hole, we might begin to realize what a biological station stands for. We need to get more deeply satu- rated with the meaning of the word “biological,” and to keep renewing our faith in it as a governing conception. Our centrifugal spec- ialities have no justification except in the ensemble, and each one of them is prolific in grotesque ab- surdities, for which there is no cor- rection in disconnection with the organic whole. But why talk of an organic whole, which no man can grasp, or make any pretension to mastering? Precisely that makes it necessary to talk and act as if we knew the fact, and as if our in- ability had not rendered us insen- sible to our need. Physiology is meaningless without morphology, and morphology equally so without physiology. Both find their mean- ing in biology, and in nothing less. What an absurdity was human an- atomy without comparative anatomy ; and comparative anatomy was only a much bigger absurdity until the general connection of things began to dawn in the conceptions of bi- ology. Just think of a physiologist seriously proclaiming to the world that instinct reduces itself in the last analysis to heliotropism, stere- tropism and the like. The whole course of evolution drops out of sight altogether, and things are ex- plained as if the organic world were a chemical creation only a few hours old. The absurdity would be no greater for a geologist to try to ex- plain the earth without reference to its past history. Think of a young morphologist, with all the advantages of the Naples station at hand, yes, within the walls of that grand _ station, loudly sneering at Darwinism, and spending his wit in derisve cari- catures of general truths beyond the horizon of his special work and thought. And shall we forget the physiologist whose philosopher’s stone is the search for his ancestry among the arachnids; or the an- atomist who reverses his telescope to discover that his science begins and ends in terminology? And could we, much as we might yearn for such a benediction, forget the omnipresent and omniscient sys- tematist, whose creed is summed up in priority ? The catholicon for crankiness has not been found, but in science there is but one cure where cure is pos- sible; it is exposure to the full and direct rays of the system as a whole. The application to the subject in hand is patent. The one great charm of a biological station must be the fullness with which it represents the biological system. Its power and effcacy diminish in geometrical ratio with every source of light ex- cluded. My plea, then, is for a biological station, and I believe that experi- mental biology would be the most important element in such a station. It is now possible to procure a fav- orable site, with land and fresh- water privileges, in close proximity with the Marine Biological Labor- atory, and with a moderate founda- tion to start with, the work could begin at any moment. The project is certainly one of preeminent importance and for suc- cessful undertaking of that magni- tude we need the active cooperation of American Naturalists. I bring the suggestion before you in the hope that it will enlist your interest and support. Dr. William S. McCann, from the department of medicine of the University of Rochester, spent a few days with his wife and children at the laboratory apartment hotse. They will probably return~ in August. NET PAGE ELEVEN Bee Calin Eliminated The binocular feature divides the effort of observation and thus elimi- nates all eye-strain. This makes the instrument exceptionally suitable for continuous use without fatigue. By proper adjustment with the binocular vision, a stereoscopic ef- fect, showing objects as they really are, is obtained giving superior de- tail and clearness of the image. FFSE-8 Binocular Microscope with 10X, 45X, 97X Achromatic Objec- tives; 5X, 10X Huygenian Eye- pieces; A bbe Condenser 1.20; in CABS Hig. soctste -veeyer ee tanh Cie r ance $190.00 Write for further information. Bausch & Lomb Optical Cag . 699 St. Paul Street A N Rochester, N. Y. fH, _ Turtox Biological Red Book , ee ee Demonstration Materials for Zoology Embryology Comparative Anatomy Entomology Parasitology Medical Biology and the Related Sciences WRITE FOR YOUR COPY OF THIS 230-PAGE HANDBOOK The Sign of the Turtox Pledges Absolute Satisfaction General Biological Supply House (INCORPORATED) 761-763 EAST 69th PLACE CHICAGO | ILLINOIS PAGE TWELVE M. B. L. CLUB MEETING The annual meeting of the mem- bers of the M. B. L. Club for the election of officers for this session will be held Monday evening in the Club House at eight o'clock. All members are urgently requested to be present and take part. Member- ship in the Club is open to all per- sons associated with the Marine Bi- ological Laboratory or fhe a Wess Bureau of Fisheries on payment of club dues of $1.50 at the Business Office of the Laboratory. Last year the club sponsored the regular Saturday night dances, sev- eral bridge parties, Friday afternoon teas, kept a plentiful supply of magazines and newspapers on hand, and acted, in general, as a center for the social activities of the Woods Hole summer colony. In order to carry ona similar program this sum- mer it will be necessary for all stu- dents, investigators and instructors to cooperate as loyally as they have in the past. Miss Polly Crowell will be glad to receive the member- ship fees at any time in Mr. Mac- Naught’s office. A meeting of the members of the Executive Committee on Wednes- day afternoon laid tentative plans for the season's activities, but their success will depend largely on the response of the members present this year, and their cooperation with the officers they choose next Mon- day evening. THE KNY-SCHEERER CORPORATION HOLDS EX- HIBITION OF APPARATUS The Kny-Scheerer Corporation held an interesting exhibition of their general biological supplies and apparatus in the old lecture hall from June 24 to 29. They showed their models of prehistoric animals, their Spaetholtz preparations, and their mounted life histories of vari- ous forms. Most striking of these was that of the termite. They had several cases of mounted butterflies from India, the South Sea Islands, and South America, and they were of many very beautiful hues. Besides their skeletons of the more common animals, they showed one of the Panda, a small animal of about the size of a cat. A Panda was among the trophies brought back from China by the recent Roosevelt expedition. The apparatus side of the exhibit was composed of dissecting instru- ments, nets, containers, water baths, and a new type of Asta Incubator, which is claimed to be remarkable for maintaining constant tempera- ture. DOCK HAND SAVED BY DARING RESCUE George H. Peters, of Sandwich risked his life in saving John W. of Woods Hole, from ne on the night of Friday, Condon, drow THE COLLECTING NET NONAMESSETT Over on Nonamessett The tide-pools shine in the sun, Till the sea comes up and claims them And they vanish one by one. The gray sheep stand on the hillside And crop at the soft green grass; Slowly they move through the sunlight As the long bright hours pass. Over on Nonamessett There are shells for a child’s delight, And the painted I ndian money In the sea sand fine and white. But a deer sprang up from the thicket And away on the sky's clear blue: There are nests in the boughs and grasses And the wild birds peering through. Over on Nonamessett The tide-pools gleam in the rustling bushes And the wind in the rustling bushes Is singing an old Close by the sand love tune. and seaweed The purple iris grows ; Edging the narrow sheep-walks Thereare tangles of pink wild rose. Over on Nonamessett The sea birds wheel and scream, And the hours fade and lessen Like the moments in a dream. Over on Nonamessett We'll sail in the gloaming soon, When the winds in the mast and rigging Are singing an old love tune! Reprinted by special permission from ‘“Nonamessett and Other Verses” June 21. Both men are dock hands at the steamship wharf and were waiting to handle the hawsers of the oncoming Marthas Vineyard. The ship hit the piles with a great impact, and Condon, losing his bal- ance, fell into the muddy waters. As he fell he knocked his head against the wharf and immediately sank to the bottom in an un- conscious state. The cry of “Man overboard!” rang out, and Peters, without hesitating dove for spot where his mate had disap- peared. If the action had been de- layed the advancing prow of the vessel would probably have pre- | vented the rescue. The steamer, under the swift command of Captain Manuel K. Sylvia, immediately reversed her engines and backed away from the scene of the disaster, while several hundred passengers and a_ large crowd that had collected on the dock looked on. Antone Pietraszek saw _ that Peters needed help in bringing the struggling man ashore. He prompt- ly dove in, and together they hoist- ed Condon up the ladder that had been fetched by John Vallis, station agent, and Robert Neal, his assist- ant. Condon soon regained con- sciousness and was no more worse off for his unfortunate experience than a wetting and an aching head. the | ‘ By Eleanor Addison. REFLECTOR MYSTERY EXPLAINED Many questions have been asked about the weird looking — silver colored objects that may be found perching at different angles around the Botany Building and the Bureau of Fisheries. These gleaming pipes and plates have been variously ex- plained by ignorant persons as devices for signalling to Mars, as ultra-modern statues, and as ‘something to do with airplanes!” These guesses are all wrong. They are simply reflectors with alumin- |um painted surface for throwing sunlight into the laboratories of Dr. N. A. Cobb, who finds that 'they offer the best light for his |microscopical work. The light is neither tiring to the eye nor is it too intense, and although it is de- | pendent on the weather, it is fouad ;to be much better than the best arc- light. | In an interview the other day | Dr..Cobb told one on himself. Long ago in Australia he had one ot these reflectors on the roof of the balcony of his house. For setting it he used a small hand mirror, in order to direct the beam of light to the microscope mirror inside. One day one of a couple of young things walking by was heard to remark to the other—‘Funny old man lives there! Keeps that thing to look at himself in!” Headquarters for HUMAN AND ZOOLOGICAL SPALTEHOENZ TRANSPARENT PREPARATIONS SKELETONS AND SKULLS ANATOMICAL MODELS * (CHARTS DISSECTING INSTRUMENTS LABORATORY AND STUDENTS SPECIALTIES Please check catalog you wish :— lish Spalteholz No. 29 Skeletons, Models, etc. [ | Charts No. 31 Dissecting Instruments, etc. CLAY-ADAMS CO. IMPORTERS AND WHOLESALE DISTRIBUTORS 119 EAST 24th STREET NEW YORK CITY THE COLLECTING NET _PAGE THIRTEEN COMING! “Ten Days that Shook the World” The Russian “Birth of a Nation’’ Scenario and direction by SERGEI M. EISENSTEIN Thursday, July 18 M. B. L. Auditorium 8:30 P. M. Woods Hole Presented under the auspices of THE COLLECTING NET for the benefit of its Scholarship Fund. Through the courtesy of the Russian government Hisen- stein was given carte blanche in taking the scenes showing episodes in Petrograd during the momentous days of 1917 when the Soviet Republic of Russia came into being. The countless statues and Czarist emblems which had been re- moved from the streets and squares and public buildings to museums were once more installed in their old time locations. Regimental uniforms discarded when the Czar’s armed forces became the troops of the Republic were once more seen upon the streets, displacing the pointed cloth helmets and sky blue uniforms of the Soviets. Whole sections of the city were closed to traffic while Eisenstein directed the movements of the 120,000 extras who under his commands once more participated in the stirring events leading up to the fall of the Provisional government. Even the naval vessels which in October, 1917, helped make history which changed a nation from an empire to a republic once more steamed up the Neva from Kronstadt and anchored within the city limits, their stalwart sailors joining in the vast street demonstrations which form one of the unique features of Eisenstein’s latest masterpiece. THE OPINION OF THE PRESS “The pictures in mass movement, “So refreshing, so _ startling, in impact, in color and in their beautiful or strange that one suggestion of actuality are in wants to say ‘hold it’ to the opera- every Way magnificent. * * * A tor and gaze as one does at some- rugged and savagely breath tak- thing hung in a gallery.’’ ing document. * * * The pictures é THE NEW REPUBLIC. are marvelously charged with movement and force.” “Impressive, sweeping * * sig- —THE WORLD. nificant because of the power of its technique and unusual dram- “Possesses a vigor, a savage atic heights * obtainable through WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE gusto and frequently a smashing pictorial quality that places it among the films to be seen.” —THE HERALD TRIBUNE. “Possibly the most distinguished picture in the history of the cin- ema, by all odds the one really interesting picture of this season. ‘Ten Days’ * * is the art of the moving pictures matured, after years of effort.” —THE NEW YORKER. ADMISSION 50c intelligent, appreciative use of the camera, * * An epic in theme. Rarely have we seen a more mag- nificent play of lights and shadows.” —FILM DAILY, “Must be adjudged among the movie offerings as indisputably the most significant. * * Startling visual effects produced by purely dynamic means.”’ —THE NATION. RESERVED SEATS $1.00 Tickets obtainable at the office of THE CoLtectine Net in Woods Hole or at Robinson’s Pharmacy in Falmouth. ANATOMICAL STORAGE BOXES OF WHITE ENAMELED SHEET IRON Size 60 x 45 x 30 cm STORAGE BOXES, of acid-proof, white enameled sheet iron, which is also resistant to both alcohol and Kaiserling solution. With trough inside top for air-tight sealing with glycerine, paraffin, etc. As used for storage of large anatomi- cal specimens where convenient access and air-tight closure are essential. The sizes offered are those in use in the Ana- tomical Laboratory, Medical Department, University of Penn- sylvania. Forty-five additional sizes are available for special importation. A list of these additional sizes with prices is sent upon request. 6255. Storage Boxes, as above described, complete with lid. engeth;, Cm cecste.d econ 60 105 105 105 105 MAW Or Ae oasoawoocc 45 45 45 45 45 Lalas ateye COnah So Ata eos 30 15 25 30 40 Number in original case 4 3 2 2 2 Each, from stock ...... 40.00 45.00 50.00 52.50 60.00 Code Word - - - Imobd Imodz Imofe Imohr Imojn NOTE.—From the stock prices above printed we allow a discount of 20% on special importation orders amounting to $500.00 or more— delivery time approximately five months. At the time this adver- tisement is prepared a sample assortment only is in our stock for immediate shipment. Such stock will be increased both as to size and assortment as demand becomes apparent. ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY Retail—W holesale—Export LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS PHILADELPHIA, U. S. A. Cable Address “Balance”, Philadelphia INTERNATIONAL LABORATORY CENTRIFUGES INTERNATIONAL EQUIPMENT COMPANY 352 WESTERN AVE. BOSTON, MASS., U.S. A. PAGE FOURTEEN THE COLLECTING’ NET THE LEATHER SHOP Falmouth, Mass. ARTHUR C. EASTMAN FLEMING’S BOOT SHOP FOOTWEAR FOR EVERY OCCASION FALMOUTH. MASS. Parkway Shops Opp. Filene’s High Pressure Greasing Texaco Products WOODS HOLE GARAGE COMPANY Opposite Station —————— narra nen’ FALMOUTH PLUMBING AND HARDWARE CO. Opposite the Public Library FALMOUTH Phone 260 Follow the Crowd to DANIELS’ for Home-made Ice Cream Delicious Sandwiches, Coffee PICNIC LUNCHES Hardware Paints and Varnishes 5 and 10c Department CHARLES T. EASTMAN FALMOUTH, MASS. KITCHEN FURNISHINGS Tel. 407 GLENWOOD RANGES FOURTH OF JULY KEEPS FIRE DEPARTMENT BUSY CALL For Cleaning, Dyeing and Re- pairing Ladies’ and Gents’ Garments M. DOLINSKY 752 The Third and Fourth of July were scarcely holidays this year for the Woods Hole Fire Department. There were fourteen fires in and Hole to which the At 11 o'clock on the morning of the about Woods THE QUALITY SHOP Dry Goods, Toilet Articles, Shoes and Souvenirs local firemen had to respond. Ask for things you do not see. Woods Hole Fourth there was a small but nasty SHON SURES fire on the steamship wharf. This and another at the home of Mr. Dresses — Linens — Taces }| Charles R. Stower in Quisset were Fine Toilet Articles 25 (ae art Oger en ep eee ee a Wiizabett “ardén=Coty directly caused by fireworks. on Yardley the third Mr. Hoyt. L. Savery’s Choice Bits from Pekin : dump caught fire and had to be ex- MRS. WEEKS SHOPS FALMOUTH tinguished. Engine 2 and Hose 5 are manned this summer by the following men, several of whom are connected with SANSOUCYIS BEAUTY PARLOR the Laboratory and the Bureau of Frederic’s Permanent Waves Fisheries : — James McInnis, Cap- and tain; George Ferris, Lieutenant; All Branches of Beauty Culture Robert Goffin, District Engineer ; Falmouth Phone 19-M Thomas Waldron, driver; Algeron Leathers ; Jeffrey Lehy; Nelson Ca- Wich ia HaMmOntn Stopeat hoon; Henry McBeth; Walter Kahler; Robert Kahler; Joseph ISSOKSON’S Armstrong ; Stanley Eldridge ; COMPLETE LINE of FOOTWEAR || Benjamin Cavanaugh; Hartley Opp. Library, Falmouth Phone 137-W Cassidy; Thomas Goffin; and Lay- ton Peck. The Fire Station has had for the last two years two mascots, “‘Jocko” and “Vimbo”. The latter of these tiny simians made his stage debut in the University Players’ Guild production, “The Devil in the Cheese,” last week. He took the part of the gorilla. His acting was so naive, and he endeared himself so greatly to both audience and cast that the Guild wants to purchase ‘him and train him for other and greater parts. The Firemen announce that their dances in the Community Hall will be regular Friday affairs every week from now on. Eight o'clock to midnight is the time, and Sam Col- lins’ orchestra will play. PARK TAILORING AND CLEANSING SHOP Weeks’ Building, Falmouth Phone 239-W Free Delivery SPECIAL RATES TO LABORATORY MEMBERS SAMUEL CAHOON Wholesale and Retail Dealer FISH AND LOBSTERS Tel. Falmouth 660-661 Woods Hole and Falmouth in WOODS HOLE MARKET Fresh Fruits and Vegetables in Season and Heavy Western Beef Sandwich Meats for Woods Hole FIRE ALARMS 2—All Out, Noon, and 4:30 P.M. 32—Fire 33—General Picnics Phone 639 Station Alarm 324—Gunning Point JAMES RESTAURANT 325—Sippewissett Hotel 826—Quissett Harbor House 34—Quissett. and Buzzards Bay Down by the Depot Avenues | 341—Cherry Valley 342—Nobska Point (East Side) s—Marshal’s, Quissett Avenue 24$—Quissett 347—School Street FILMS and DEVELOPING Four Corners WALTER 0. LUSCOMBE REAL ESTATE AND INSURANCE 348—Carleton Estate 349—Gansett 35—West and Millfield Streets 36—Buoy Yard 37—Steamboat Wharf 38—Prospect Street and Buzzards Bay Ave. 39—Penzance Point Woods Hole Phone 622 Compliments of PENZANCE GARAGE a5 O TT 4 WOODS HOLE, MASS. Boe WE ANOS EN Day or Night All other calls are in Falmouth Phone 652 A. L.A. Tewing town and its outlying points. | interesting SEVERAL HELPLESS CRAFT ARE TOWED TO SAFETY On July 5, at 6.00 p. m., a small speedboat belonging to James Reed Morss of Boston and Vine- yard Haven was rescued by the CG-147, in command of Chief Boatswain’s Mate John J. Quick- ert. The speed-boat, which was helpless because its wiring had been destroyed by a small fire, was dragging anchor and was drifting towards Middleground shoal. There was a heavy sea running and the owner of the boat, who was its sole passenger at the time, requested to be towed to the Haven. He was immedi- ately passed a line and taken to the steamboat wharf. On July 2 the CG-235 saw the sloop “Martin Pring” making little headway against the strong tide and being swept dangerously close to the Middle Ledge rocks as it attempted to navigate the Hole by way of the “Broadway Chan- nel.” She was heaved a line and eased back into Woods Hole har- bor. Other activities of the week in- cluded pulling the sloop “Rowdy” off a shoal in New Bedford harbor on June 30. The same day an- other patrol boat aided the motor boat “Waitabit” which ran out of gas in Quick’s Hole. On July 1 the schooner ‘‘Arthur James” was pulled off the rocks on Sconticut Point. DOCTORS VISIT WOODS HOLE DURING CRUISE Drs. Thomas Hughes and Wal- ter Goebel of the Rockefeller Insti- tute and Dr. Fred W. Stewart of the Memorial Hospital for Cancer and Allied Diseases completed an New They cruised down in their Malabar yawl, the boat trip from 22 York on June | Bar Maid, and encountered con- siderable difficulty m navigating through the dense fog. The three scientists left New York on Friday morning and spent the first night in New London. The fog hung continually over the Con- necticut coast, and they were forced to spend another night in that port. On Sunday the fog was not so heavy, and they lifted anchor and cruised cautiously along the coast to the harbor refuge at Point Judith. The fog cleared partially about ten o’clock on Mon- ‘day morning, and the sun-burned trio were able to drop anchor in ; Little Harbor before the sun went down. Drs. Hughes and Goebel remain- |ed in Woods Hole for several days, but Dr. Stewart returned to New York by boat the night after to continue his work at Memorial Hospital. THE COLLECTING NET PAGE FIFTEEN THE DONOVAN AFFAIR The scene is laid in the lobby of the University Players theatre at Old Silver Beach. Time—end of Act II, any night from July 8-13. (Emotional hiatus among specta- tors who have emerged for a breath of air....also to breathe detective theories into the air. ) First Voice: “It’s the wife, I tell you. SHE killed Jack Don- ovan. Didn't you see the bloody handkerchief she sneaked out of her dress and hid in a book? Say Ill stake my microscope on it.” Seconp Vorce: “Listen here —if it wasn’t the butler who did! it, then why did he burn those papers? Tell me that if you can!” Tuirp Voice: “You're crazy. Those were just little stunts to throw you off the track. Pick out the silent guy—it'll be Neil Linsey. How much d’ye bet?” FourtH Voice: “I wouldn't stoop to conquer. It’s the cat’s-eye ring! Some kind of X-Ray ex- amination kills on sight. The knife stuff is just to confuse you.” Even the stars blinked bewildered at the mystery. The nice polite people of Cape Cod were ready to do battle for their theories. But it was a grand and glorious feeling to troop in at the commencement of | Act III and know that in twenty- minutes the mystery would be cleared. And if anyone doubts that the University Players did not “put it over” last week, he or she should have stood in that outdoors lobby, listening to the fine frenzy of con- jecture evoked. “The Donovan Affair” was one of those knife-in-the-dark every- body-guilty mystery dramas, con- ceived solely to excite and bewilder the onlooker and then to let him down with an awful plop when the murderer turns out to be the butler instead of one of the high-powered women who figure so emotionally in the unravelling of the plot. The audience got very excited about it each time the lights went out and the cat’s eye glimmered green, the communal blood-pressure rose ten points. Since this can be the only criterion for the success of such a play, “The Donovan Affair” was thereby a success. Bartlett Quigley played an es- pecially good character part as Car- ney—‘“just a policeman, thank God!” He lounged, chewed a tooth- pick and nonchalantly got over to the audience the amusing sang froid of the man to whom murder is just a nursery rhyme. Kingsley Perry, playing the part of John Kaillian, the District Attorney, was violent and effective in his. role and Bret- aigne Windust as Nelson, the guilty butler, played an excellent part, poised and suave. Elizabeth Fenner acted cleverly the role of Lydia Rankin, seeming to draw the guilt upon her own head by a deftly raised eye-brow and a Jocanda smile that baffled everyone. Her stage presence was professional and, with the exception of Margaret ! | fant. Lee Burgess playing the part of her s playing step-daughter, Miss Fenner far out-'! shone the other women in the cast. Julia Dorr, for example, playing Anne Holt, one of the suspects, had as her big scene a murderous mo- ment when she sneaks up on the butler with a knife in her upraised hand. Had one not seen the shin- ing blade, one might have imagined she was tiptoing up to a cradle to dangle a rattle over a gurgling in- A woman out to kill is usually much more savage than Miss Dorr’s version of her. However, the play moved swiftly and excitingly through its blood and thunder—and for two hours the Woods Hole delegation forgot all about the fascinating reproductive processes of polyps. Kathryn Hulme. PUPPETEERS VISIT WOODS HOLE The Yale Puppeteers stopped at Woods Hole on Wednesday, July 10, on what they call their ‘farewell tour as students.” This trip, which is to take them through New Eng- land and eventually through the; whole country, is their fifth season on the road, and the third that they have visited Woods Hole. The three men of the company have just finished their course at Yale and will go on a winter tour after the summer is over. Harry Burnett, who is the de- signer and director of the show, is at present in Hollywood directing the first marionette talkie. The Puppeteers gave “Puss in Boots” as their matinee. This was accompanied by piano music. The evening performance was “The Puppet Revue,” which included such acts as “The Haydn Trio,” “The Five-foot Shelf,” “Nadja,” and “Hibiscus Princess.” These marionettes contain sixty “actors”, which are operated by eight hundred and fifty strings, more than any other similar troup in the country. The three young men who run the performance must certainly have their hands full! THE FATE OF THE EBEN A. THATCHER Early this spring there appeared | in the Boston papers an account of the sinking of the “Eben A. Thach- er’, a fifty foot motor driven schooner engaged in freight service to the Vineyard. The real cause of this accident, which was not stated, was two waves which swept over the boat, filling the cargo of iron pipe with sea water. This caused the vessel to plunge bow down off the end of Naushon island before the water could run from the pipes. The schooner was raised later when a boat from New Bedford succeed- ed in pumping water from her hold, and she is again in service between Wood’s Hole and Martha’s Vine- yard. This number of THE COLLECTING NET will interest your friends. Mail them a copy. BIOLOGICAL SUPPLIES The Supply Depart- ment of M. B. L. de- sires to call attention Preserved Bullfrogs We are offering attractive prices on of preparations in the lobby at the Supply Department. to its exhibit and preserved and injected bullfrogs. We shall be glad to make quota- send our zoological cata- The Southwestern Biological Supply House 211 South Polk St. tions or A large stock of zoological, botani- cal material and miscroscope slides on sale. logue, Orders solicited now livery. for fall de- For further information apply at the Supply Department Office. Catalogues on request. Dallas, Texas THE UNIVERSITY PLAYERS GUILD PRESENTS “The Last of Mrs. Cheney” A Lonsdale Drawing Room Comedy WEEK OF JULY 15-20 AT 8:30 P. M. Guild Theatre, Old Silver Beach, West Falmouth M. B. L. NIGHT EVERY WEDNESDAY Discounts for students and faculty, Bus may be arranged for this week The Elizabeth Theatre FALMOUTH, MASS. Every Night at 8 o’clock. Feature Picture at 8.45 Short Reels Repeated SATURDAY NIGHT TWO SHOWS 7 and 9 P. M. MATINEE MONDAY, WEDNESDAY and FRIDAY at 2.30 P.M. Sun. July 14 Mon.-Tues. July 15-16 Wed.-Thurs. July 17-18 Fri. July 19 Sat. July 20 “The King of Kings” “The Awakening” “Coquette” “Hearts in Dixie” “The Fall of Eve” Visit Malchman’s THE LARGEST DEPARTMENT STORE ON CAPE COD Falmouth Phone 116 rm em rr PAGE SIXTEEN THE COLLECTING NET Coming Soon a new third edition of the standard textbook on zoological principles Principles of ANIMAL BIOLOGY By A. FRANKLIN SHULL With the collaboration of GEORGE R. LaRUE and ALEXANDER G. RUTHVEN of the University of Michigan McGraw-Hill Publications in the Zoological Sciences 4 N this new edition the authors reaffirm their conviction that the best approach to biological science is through the presentation of great generalizations and fundamental principles. The intimate relation between function and structure is emphasized by combining the chapters on morphology and physiology of higher types. The combined discussion is di- vided into several chapters in recognition of distinct types of physiological processes. The account of cell structure and cell physiology has been rewritten to emphasize still more strongly the fundamental features, and to include some of the most recent conclusions of the general physiologists. The chapter on Genetics has been strengthened by the in- clusion of an adequate account of linkage and sex-linkage, by revision of the problems and by the inclusion of additional problems. The entire book has been thoroughly revised to reflect new discoveries and altered points of view. Another Shull Book Shull’s PRINCIPALS OF ANIMAL BIOLOGY has been widely used in previous editions. In fact this past year it has been in use in 87 col- leges. Heredity 287 Pages, 6 x 9, 111 Dlustrations $3.00 Postpaid McGraw-Hill Publications in the Zoological Sciences This book presents the ele- mentary principles of biologi- cal inheritance so that students who have had no previous training in biology can master the text. It prepares a founda- tion, in other animals and in plants, of knowledge concern- ing the types of phenomena which may be expected to be found in man, and then dis- cusses human inheritances and other practical applications. A Revision of Shull’s Laboratory Directions in Animal Biology is also in Press. Send For Copies On Approval McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc. Penn. Terminal Building 370 Seventh Avenue New York lewns = remaeen MASTER MINDS IN MEDICINE By JOHN C. HEMMETER, M.D., Px.D., Sc.D., LL.D. An Analysis of Human Genius as the Instrument in the Evolution of Great Constructive Ideas in the History of Medicine, together with a System of Historic Methodology. With an Introduction by KARL SUDHOFF, M.M. Professor of History of Medicine in the University of Leipzig, 1895-1924 I. Methodology in Medical Historiography. II. Sources of Medical History. and Historic Critique. Subdivisions of Methodology Ill. Can Medical History be Conceived as Subject to the Laws which Control and Initiate General History? IV. Ideas as Factors in Medical History. Vv. The Role and Funetjon of Great Men in Medical History. VI. The Criteria of what Constitutes a Great Medical Discovery or Invention. Who is the Real Discoverer or Inventor? The Historic Evidence Establishing Claims of Priority. VII. Statistics as Adjuvant Method in Historiography. Tendencies in Medicine in the Twentieth Century. IX. Theodor Billroth, Musical and Surgical’ Philosopher. A Biography and Review of his work on Psycho-Physio- logical Aphorisms on Music, X. History of the Clinical Recognition of Gastric Ulcer. XI. The History of the Circulation of the Blood. Contributions of the Italian Anatomists and Physiologists: Their Bearing Upon the Discovery by Harvey. XII. Science and Art in Medicine. Their Influence on the De- velopment of Medical Thinking. XIII. Rudolf Virchow's Accomplishments in the Field of Scien- tific Anthropology. XIV. Albrecht von Haller: Scientific, Literary, and Poetical Ac- tivity. XV. The United States Army Yellow Fever Commission, and the Transmission of Yellow Fever. XVI. A Pathfinder in the Etiology and Prophylaxis of Yellow Fever; Henry R, Carter, Surgeon United States Public Health and Marine Hospital Service. XVII. In Memoriam: Christian A. Herter, XVIII. Priority of Employment of the Roentgen Ray in Studying the Physiology and Pathology of the Digestive Tract, XIX. History of Tendencies of Modern Physiological Discipline in Medical Schools, XX. Michael Servetus: Discoverer of the Pulmonary Circula- tion, His Life and Work. XXI. Lavoisier, and the History of the Physiology of Respiration and Metabolism. XXII. Pasteur, XNIII. History of Alcohol as a Substance for Human Consumption, XXVI. Leonardo Da Vinci as a Scientist. XXV. Leonardo Da Vinci: Personality and Psychography. XXVI. Physiology of Leonardo Da Vinci: Heart and Circulation, Digestion, Respiration, XXVII. Joseph Janvier Woodward: Pioneer in Photomicrography, Pathologie Histology, and Medical Historian of the Civil War. XXVIII. William Beaumont and the Beginnings of Modern Physiol- ogy of Digestion. XXIX. Goethe as a Naturalist. XXX. Darwin. XXXI, Psychography of the Investigator. XXXII. Heredity and Genius, XXXIII. Conclusions. Crown Octavo of 800 pages, with 32 inserts, boxed, $10.00 MEDICAL LIFE PRESS Mt. Morris Park West New York, N. Y. Volume IV. Number 3 BIOLOGICAL STATION OF TAMARIS SUR MER H. Carport, Director The Faculté des Sciences of Lyon has a marine biological station at Tamaris sur Mer. It was founded by professor Raphael Dubois. Prof. Cardot, head of the physiology de- partment of the Faculté des Sci- ences of Lyon, is now the acting director. On the ground floor of the main building are, a museum room ex-| hibiting the animals of the port of Toulon, a library, a large labora- tory room and a small workshop. Bedrooms for 7 or 8 workers are} on the second floor with a few pri-) vate laboratory rooms for research. In a large garden is the annex with two aquarium rooms, where animals used in physiological re-| search are kept in running sea water. The station has also a sea reserve touching the edge of the beach and separated from the buildings by} only a narrow street. The laboratory possesses a motor boat and all the necessary apparatus for towing and dredging. Favor- ably situated, the station offers all the opportunities for studying the rich fauna of the port of Toulon. The workers will find here all the modern apparatus for physio- logical experimentation. The coast of Provence has a very rich flora and will furnish botanists and stu- dents of algae with much valuable material. The laboratory is open all the year to foreign and French students ; and although emphasis is given to phys- iology, it is a very interesting center for all biologists. Currents in the Hole At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time) the current in the hole turns to run from Buzzards Bay to Vineyard Sound: Date A. M. P.M. July 20 4:06 4:11 Hictlive Zilles ey. 4:44 4:53 miko eee SE25 5) a0) Niliva2oieria.s.: =: 6:07 6:18 Welly Ze aera 6:45 6:50 litle 2S). crete eeere US 7:40 Jisib Ay; ota es 8:12 8:31 Witty 27s i oars 8:52 R17 In each case the current changes six hours later and runs from the Sound to the Bay. It must be re- membered that the schedule print- ed above is dependent upon the wind. Prolonged winds sometimes cause the turning of the current to occur a half an hour earlier or later than the times given above. | ing the constitution of the club. The WOODS HOLE, MASS., SATURDAY, JULY 20, 1929 M. B. L. Calentar Sunday, July 21, 8:30 P. M. Sunday Dock. Tuesday, July 23, 8:00 P. M. Singing. Cayadetta Evening Seminar. H. Grundfest, “Visibility of the Spectrum to the Fish Eye.” Professor W. L. Dolley, Jr. ‘Some Visual Phenomena in Hristalis- tanax.”” Dr. H. K. Hartline. ‘The Course of Dark Adaptation of the Eye of Limulus as Manifested by its Electric Response.” Reception for visiting foreign bi- Ologists at Club immediately following evening seminar. Friday, July 26. 8:00 P. M. Evening Lecture. Professor Henri Freaericq of University of Liége. “Humoral Transmission of Nerve Action.” Parker Gives Subscription $1.25 Single Copies, 20e Evidence For Existence of Neurofibrils Questioned by Cowdry Who Contributes His Reasons for Believing Them to be Artifacts THE NATURE OF NEUROFIBRILS Professor G. H. Parker, professor of zoology at Harvard University, de- livered an evening lecture bearing the above title on June 21. of this lecture written by Dr. at Washington University, St. A summary ur George St. de Rénvi, associate professor of inatomy, University of Pennsylvania, is printed below. by a review of the lecture by Dr, E. V This is followed . Cowdry, who is professor of cytology Lovis. 2. eesSSSS——S—S—SSSSSSSSSSSSSsS The first part of Dr. Parker’s lecture was devoted to the general structure of the nervous tissue. He described in a very picturesque manner the works of the earlier authors, reviewing all the important steps in the history of the histological analysis of the “confused mass of elements which were assumed to serve as a basis for nervous organiza-~ tion”. This historical review was followed by a short description of the Neurone Theory, after which Dr. Parker discussed the problem of the GIFT OF $200,000 TO LABORATORY LIBRARY It is a privilege and a pleasure to | print the following official statement from Dr. Frank R. Lillie, President | of the Corporation of the Marine Biological Laboratory : In her sketch of the library of the Marine Biological Laboratory | published in the number of THE CotLectinG Net for July 6, 1929, Mrs. Montgomery reported a gift of the General Education Board of $50,000 made in 1925. This amount | was provided as a capital sum with | which to purchase serials, books and | monographs with the idea of build- ing up the library in its new quar- ters more rapidly. It was antici- pated that this sum would be ample for five years; but within a four BY GENERAL EDUCATION BOARD ANNOUNCED year period terminating this year, it will all have been expended to the |great improvement of the library, as the investigators at Woods Hole can testify. The members of the laboratory will be greatly pleased to hear that the general Education Board has contributed a sum of $200,000 to be added to the endowment fund for the general purposes of the li- brary. As this will yield an income of about $1,000 a year, there will be available for library purposes about $25,000 a year. If at any time the library is built up to all of its requirements and does not need all or any of this additional income, it can be used for other purposes at the laboratory. M. B. L. CLUB ELECTIONS AND | EVENING CONCERTS The M. B. L. Club, on the even- ing of July 15 elected the following officers for the summer: President, Dr. H. McE Knower; Vice Pres- ident, Mrs. W. E. Garrey; Secre-} tary-Treasurer, Dr. C. G. Rogers. A resolution was passed expressing thanks to the retiring officers for their efficient and untiring services. Another motion was made and accepted that the new President ap- point a committee to call a special meeting for the purpose of amend- amendment consists of creating the office of a permanent resident as- sistant treasurer. The club has this year purchased and installed an electrical reproduc- ing system. This consists of an auto- matic turntable for holding an or- dinary phonograph record, an elec- tric pick-up for transmitting the sound to the amplifier, and a New- comb-Hawley loud speaker. With this device the club can reproduce any music that has been recorded, and plans have been made for using it for the Saturday night dances and occasional musicales. SUNDAY SINGING REVIVED At a meeting this week the M. B. L. Club voted to revive the Sunday evening singing by laboratory mem- bers. The group will gather on the Cayadetta dock if the weather there is conducive to singing. Otherwise the songsters will assemble in the Club House. jheurohbrils, the main subject of his lecture. All former observations supporting the idea of the existence of these structures were summar- ized. Full credit was given to 3ozler, who recently observed the neurofibrils in living nerve cells in the circular nerve band of the jelly- fish Rhizostoma. These observa- tions sufficiently prove the existence of neurofibrils as constituents of living nerve cells. The question as to the function of the neurofibrils was treated by Dr. Parker with the greatest ob- jectiveness. After the confusion of opinions in that field had been pointed out, the different aspects of the subject were analyzed one by one. The widely accepted theory that the neurofibrils are the trans- mitting circuits of the nervous sys- tem, was severely criticised. All the evidence put forth in favor of the nerve impulse conducting function of the neurofibrils was disproved. The theory of the supporting func- tion of the fibrils was also not ac- cepted. Then a new hypothesis was suggested. Well known facts scattered in the earlier and in the recent literature on the subject were brought together and arranged with masterly logic to form one or- ganic unit. An attempt is made here to fol- low cautiously the trend of Dr. Parker’s thoughts and to reproduce them as far as possible in his own words. The nerve fibers of higher animals transmit two sets of independent influences. First of these is the influence that excites activity in a muscle and that is ordinarily spoken (Continued on Page 2) PAGE TWO THE COLLECTING NET Existence of Neurofibrils (Continued from Page 1) of as the nerve impulse. The sec- ond influence is metabolic in its nature, emanating from the nucleat- ed portion of the cell and passing to the uttermost ends of the neuronic processes. In the distal stretch of an ordinary sensory neurone in the vertebrates the nerve impulses run toward the central organ, while the metabolic influences run away from it. Hence these two activities must be admitted to be separate. What parts of the neurone are concerned | with these two types of conduction? In many instances the nucleated part of the neurone (the trophic or metabolic center) lies in the line of nervous transmission. But in a number of other cases, as in the unipolar neurones in higher verte- brates and in some invertebrates, the nucleated portion of the neurone is well to one side of the tract of neu- ronic nervous transmission. In these cells the bundles of neu- rofibrils start from the region of the neuronic nucleus, pass down the unipolar neck of the cell body and spread from that neck distally and proximally over the fibers of the neurone to their terminations. The unipolar cell bodies of a group of such neurones could be removed without disturbing their function. Hence, it may be concluded that the cell bodies of many neurones are not traversed by the nerve impulses. The course of the neurofibrils does not follow that of the nerve im- pulses but does duplicate exactly that of the metabolic influences. Also the course of development of the fibrils supports Dr. Parker’s hypothesis. The initial appearance of the fibrils is in close proximity to the neuronic nucleus and they de- velop some time before nervous functional activity has appeared. Both these facts are significant only if we believe the fibrils to be con- cerned with metabolic influences. REVIEW By Dr. E. V. Cownpry Professor of Cytology, Washington University Dr. Parker’s lecture on neuro- fibrils was a very clear and inter- esting interpretation of structures which have puzzled neurologists for more than half a century. When I asked him for his manuscript so that I might more accurately com- ment on the food for thought which he had given me, he handed me a reprint of the original paper as published in the Quarterly Review of Biology and said: “Go to it, pick all the holes you can.” Briefly stated, Parker’s conten- tion is that the neurofibrils are not artifacts, as Bayliss and others have suggested, but exist as such in liv- ing nerve cells, and that, in view of their arrangement, it is probable that they are concerned with the conduction of metabolic influences. He is careful to state that: “The idea that the neurofibrillar system of the nerve cell as a part of the metabolic outfit of the neurone is avowedly hypothetical and yet as an hypothesis it meets at present more of the known facts about the neu- rone than the hypotheses of nervous conduction or of support appear to do. Hence comes the justification of its presentation, in full under- standing that its worth will be de- termined as our knowledge of the neurone increases.” Others have believed in the real existence of neurofibrils and atten- tion has before been called to the fact that they are oriented parallel to “the transport of nutritive ma- terial’, but the claim that the neu- rofibrillar system “is concerned specifically with the distribution of metabolic influences” has not to the best of my knowledge been made. Neither has emphasis been laid, as Parker lays it, on the significant difference which appears to exist between the pathways of metabolic influences and nervous impulses in the ordinary sensory cells of verte- brates. In even tentatively apprais- ing this hypothesis we have to con- sider two questions: First, is Parker justified in assuming the existence of neurofibrils in nerve cells gen- erally? Second, is the evidence which he presents concerning their function valid, and, if so, does it permit of any other interpretation than that which he gives? Parker expresses himself as much impressed with the recent investiga- tions of Bozler (1927) who: “has shown that in the large living nerve cells in the circular nerve band of the jellyfish Rhisostoma it is pos- sible to demonstrate with remark- able clearness a system of neuro- fibrils”. Bozler has contributed convincing details concerning the be- havior of these neurofibrils during the changes which are induced in living nerve cells placed in hyper- tonic sea water. We accept his ob- servations at their face value but cannot accept without qualification Parker’s conclusion that: “Evidence of this kind points to the correct- ness of the original observations by Remak and by Schultze and ren- ders it impossible to deny the ex- istence of neurofibrils as constitu- ents of living nerve cells”. published on the nerve cells of cray- fish in 1843 and Schultze on those of Torpedo in 1871. If these are the principal observations of neuro- fibrils in living nerve cells the evi- dence for their existence as funda- mental components of all nerve cells is conspicuous by its absence. Those Remak | who work with higher vertebrate | forms are usually particularly skep- tical regarding neurofibrils. There might be some excuse for this ina- | bility to detect the neurofibrils if these elements are just on the bor- derline of microscopic visability (which I imagine is Parker’s idea) had not the investigators one and all a clear picture in their minds of what to look for. Knowing, how- ever, just what their appearance is said to be like, the consistent failure to see them assumes some signifi- cance, the more so since techniques, far in advance of those available when the neurofibrils were first dis- covered, have been used. It is no longer a question of observing strands of material of noticeably different refractive index from the rest of the cytoplasm when viewed by direct illumination. We can now employ strong sources of light and cardioid condensers which reveal in a dark background surfaces of sep- aration hitherto invisible. Slight pressure of the cover glass on cells under observation creates mass movements in the cytoplasm which are seemingly unrestricted by any system of fibrils. When the con- ‘tents escape through rupture of the cell membrane no fibrils are seen. Under favorable conditions in tissue cultures the Lewises (1924) ‘“‘have repeatedly examined living fibers with bright and dark-field illumina- tion without detecting neurofibrilz.” Neither have methods of microdis- section, by which the consistency of ‘nerve cells can be directly explored, as yet revealed the existence of neu- rofibrils (personal communication from Dr. de Rényi). All this Parker fully recognizes and says, with good |} humor, “Keep at it, bring us more facts. I still think that neurofibrils will eventually be found in these nerve cells also.” At this point it should be made | abundantly clear that because in the vast majority of living nerve cells neurofibrils cannot be seen it does not follow that the beautiful metallic impregnations of fibrillar forma- tions which at rare intervals gladden the hearts of neurologists are wholly artifacts. Obviously there must be some material basis in the nerve cell for such appearances; first, because impregnations of this kind cannot be made before a certain stage is reached in the development of the nerve cell ; and, second because other cells, like gland cells, when treated by the same procedures never ex- hibit neurofibrils. But it is hard to believe that this suspected material basis closely resembles in form the conspicuous fibrils in successful permanent preparations, for if so we should see it easily in the living cell by the techniques just men- tioned; or else the occupied areas of cytoplasm should be delineated by the absence in them of the mi- croscopically visible granules which are crowded together so closely in nerve cells. Furthermore it would seem to be a safe deduction that if the neurofibrils themselves do occur in cells in which they cannot be seen in the living state they are there present in very different form from that which they exhibit in the living cells of the jellyfish, the crayfish and the: Torpedo. Yet Parker assigns the same functional interpretation to both in the absence of evidence that the ‘‘metabolic influences” which they are supposed to serve are also different. In short, I have the feeling that a weak point in Parker’s hypothesis is the elusive nature of the elements which it sets out to explain and he will, I fancy, be the first to agree with me. The evidence which he presents concerning the function of neuro- fibrils is not satisfying because it relates to the form of the neuro- fibrils and their position in the cell about which, as I have intimated, so little is known. Parker does not secure his evidence from the nerve cells of the jellyfish, the crab and the Torpedo, in which he believes the neurofibrils to be easily visible in the living state, but from those of higher forms. He draws atten- tion to “the unipolar neurones in higher vertebrates and in some in- vertebrates” and emphasizes the former: ‘In the ordinary sensory neurones of vertebrates the nerve impulses originate at the peripheral end, make their way centrally over the neurite, and, without entering the body of the cell, pass on to dis- charge at the central end of the neurone. The metabolic influences on the other hand originate in the region of the nucleus of the cell body, pass down its neck to the tract of nervous transmission where they separate into two streams, one flowing peripherally over the neu- rite and the other centrally over the central nerve process.” And fur- ther that if “....we follow the course of the neurofibrillar tracts within such neurones we find them far from agreeing with those of the nerve impulses......the bundles of neurohbrils start in the region of the neuronic nucleus, pass down the unipolar neck of the cell body and spread from that neck distally and proximally over the fibers of the neurone to their terminations”’. Parker did not explain either in his lecture or in his published paper whence this information concern- ing the neurofbrils is derived, so I asked him about it. He answered that in the unipolar nerve cells of the crab he is “able to observe in the living state exactly this arrange- ment of neurofibrils,” but it is a far cry from crabs to vertebrates. The presentation would be stronger if it were restricted to the crabs for it is in them, and in them alone, that we have clear evidence that the nervous impulse can be made to take the course which he mentions namely through the peripheral pro- cess and then directly along the cen- tral process without entering the cell body at all (cf. Bethe’s experi- ments quoted by Parker). He sum- marizes his contention in the follow- ing words: “Thus the course of the neurofibrils does not follow that of the nerve impulses but does dupli- cate exactly that of the metabolic influences. I conclude therefore that the neurofibrillar system in the neurone is concerned specifically with the distribution of the meta- bolic influences and not with the (Continued on Page 3) COWDRY REVIEW (Continued from Page 2) conduction of nerve impulses.” One can agree with Parker that the neurofibrillar system, the form of which is questionable, in the cells to which he refers, is probably not directly concerned with the conduc- tion of nerve impulses. It is im- portant, however, to note that the alternative which he accepts is not inevitable. If it could that the neurofibrils were the only material in the cell the topography of which corresponded with the distribution of metabolic influences, his position would be stronger in suggesting that they are concerned specifically (the italics are mine) with the distribution of such in- fluences. He continues: “What the metabolic influences are it is at pres- ent impossible to say. It seems hardly reasonable to think of them as streams of material in the nature of a hormone, emanating from the region of the nucleus and _perco- lating throughout the neurone. Such a passage of material might however occur over interfacial boundaries as already suggested for the nerve im- pulse by Brinkman and Szent- Gyorgi (1923). Or they may be chains of ionic readjustment such as have been proposed as an ex- planation of the nerve impulse. But however we consider them, the hy- pothesis here put forward assumes that they are what the neurofibrils transmit.” It is to be observed that in the foregoing quotation Parker suggests means of spread which have been mentioned as operative in the pro- pagation of the nervous impulse al- though he draws elsewhere a sharp | distinction between nerve impulse and metabolic influences. If par- ticular faith is to be placed in inter- facial boundaries and such bound- aries are supplied by the neurofib- ril-ground substance surface, which is the implication, then it would be more accurate to say that neuro- fibrils are not involved specifically but together or inseparably with the ground substance, by which they are surrounded, in the transmission of metabolic influences. But there are other alternatives which logically should be excluded before reaching a conclusion. It is not clear that we have to do witha case of transport along interfacial boundaries, but even adhering for the sake of discussion to this as- sumption there are other interfacial boundaries to be considered. The surface of separation between cyto- plasm and cell membrane is likewise continuous along the path of meta- bolic influences and beyond question has an existence in fact in all living nerve cells. Within the substance of the cells the mitochondria are often rod-like or filamentous and are strung out along the line of transport. They supply a discon- tinuous series of interfacial boun- daries running parallel to the direc- tion pursued by the metabolic in- be shown | DHE (COLLECTING NET PAGE THREE fluences. Also, still other surfaces may exist in living nerve cells await- ing recognition. To select a par- ticular element within the cell and to assign it a dominant role of any kind is always difficult and requires the strongest evidence, particularly so when so much faith is required in the mere acceptance of its pres- ence in the form supposed, as in the | Whatever | case of the neurofibrils. may turn out to be the truth, Par- ker’s hypothesis will undoubtedly serve the good purpose of stimulat- ing very active inquiry into the status of neurofibrils as components of living nerve cells. BOTANY NEWS Among the independent investi- gators in the Botany laboratory is Dr. Maurice Reyon, a Cosmopolitan Research Fellow. He is a French subject, born in French Guiana and educated at the University of Gre- noble. Up to the present he has been engaged in teaching in the mis- sion schools in Southern China where he has become interested in silk worms. He is investigating the quantita- tive relation between the mulberry cellulose consumption and the silk output, the time factor being taken into consideration. As Dr. Reyon asserts. “It is most interesting to realize that what the silk worm has been doing for centuries—that is to say, transforming cellulose into textile fibers—has only in compara- tively recent times been imitated in the commercial preparation of syn- thetic silk.” Unfortunately the Collecting Net reporter for the Botany Laboratory has not had the opportunity for a personal interview with Dr. Reyon, as he sends word that temporarily he is under observation in a Boston hospital for a slight illness contract- ed during his work in the silk grow- ing regions of Southern China. In- formation regarding Dr. Reyon was furnished by his colleagues in the Research Department, who are caring for his silk worms and mul- berry leaves during his absence. DR. GARREY INVOLVED IN SLIGHT TRIPLE COLLISION Professor W. E. Garrey of Woods Hole was involved in a slight automobile accident on the morning of July 17 when he at- tempted to drive out from behind a Chevrolet roadster that was parked in front of James’ Restau- rant. An oncoming Buick coupe sideswiped Dr. Garrey’s Ford sedan and forced him to scrape the side of the Chevrolet. A crowd quickly gathered, but the extent of the dam- age proved to be slight. The sedan received a dent in the right front mudguard, and the Buick a dent in the right rear mudguard. The road- ster apparently sustained the great- est injury, with a torn off hub-cap and a broken luggage carrier. A Meal of Protein Does Not Cause Leucocytosis THE NON-EXISTENCE OF DIGESTIVE LEUCOCYTOSIS Professor of Physiology, Vanderbilt University School of Medicine 3y W. E. Garrey | Dr. Garrey delivered a paner bearing the above title at the evening The author’s summary together with a review by Dr. seminar on July 9. Reznikoff are printed here. That food, especially protein food, causes an increase in the number of leucocytes in the circu- lating blood has been quite generally accepted as a fact since first re-| ported by Moleschott in 1854. Ar- neth reviewed the literature of this subject in 1923 and reported some experiments of his own supporting this view. There have been dis- senting opinions expressed recently for example by Sabin, Cunningham, Doane and Kindwall, by Shaw and by Smith and McDowell. These opinions fall short of conclusive proof merely because the conditions under which the leucocyte counts were made, fail to exclude the ef- fects of many factors which in our experience cause continuous varia- tions in the number of circulating leucocytes. These variations be- | come evident when successive counts are made; they may amount to sev- eral hundred percent depending up- on the activity of the subject. The more meticulous the technique the more certainly will these variations appear and reflect the physiological activity of the individual giving, in- stead of the “rhythms referred to by Sabin and her collaborators, the “individual patterns’ of Miss Chris- tiana Smith. These rhythms and patterns all disappear however if the subject is placed in a recumbent posture and remains in a condition of rest both physical and mental. Furthermore in about an hour of this recumbent rest the leucocyte count will have fallen to its lowest physiological level, a level which is practically as low as that before rising from a night’s sleep. This level is maintained with surprising constancy and is referred to as the basal level, and in general is between 5000 and 6000 leucocytes per cubic millimeter of blood. This is in striking contrast to the activity level of 9000 or 10,000 usually found in laboratory workers and is especially marked by the absence of the saw tooth character of the plot of suc- cessive counts made on individuals about their ordinary activities. The “basal level’? then is a con- dition with which one may compare other states and by this reference determine the effects of any single variable which may affect the leuco- cyte count. Some of the data col- lected in collaboration with Miss Virginia Butler and presented in the form of graphs indicate con- clusively that the ordinary morning meal had no apparent effect upon the activity level of subjects when they presented themselves at the laboratory, but more significant was |the fact that when these subjects assumed the recumbent posture the leucocyte count dropped according to rule and the basal level for the individual was reached in approxi- mately an hour, and remained at this low level without variation for sev- eral hours provided the subject re- mained undisturbed; there was no rise after two or three hours i. e. there was no evidence of a digestive leucocytosis. In like manner a second mid-day meal in no way af- fected the return of the leucocyte count to the low basal level. Graphs of any two subjects, one ;fed and the other without food, ‘show exactly the same variations of form if the individuals comport themselves in the same way, e. g. lying down at the same time and rising for the ordinary activities of the day simultaneously, and there was no difference in level attribut- able to food apparent on any of these graphs. What we believe to be crucial ex- periments were conducted in the following way. Subjects, without | breakfast, came into the laboratory. The first leucocyte counts showed the high activity level of about 9,000. The individuals then lay down and leucocyte counts were made every fifteen minutes for several hours. Within an hour the count was be- tween fifteen minutes for several hours. Within an hour the count was between 5000 and 6000 and the subject was then fed, in one series a protein meal, in another a carbo- hydrate meal of pancakes and syrup. Proteins are supposed to be es- pecially potent in causing digestive leucocytosis and our subjects re- ceived two pounds of beef steak, four eggs and two slices of toasted bread without fluid. In no single instance was there evidence of the slightest increase or variation in the number of circulating leucocytes although the counts were continued for as much as four hours. If how- ever the subjects for any reason as- sumed the erect posture there was an immediate increase due to pos- tural change and activity, but upon assuming the recumbent posture the count fell again to the basal level within an hour. We conclude that there is no true digestive leucocytosis; that such variations as have been reported must be attributed to other forms of physiological activity which cause a vascular shift resulting in a redis- tribution of blood and of leucocytes already in the circulatory system. PAGE FOUR THE COLLECTING NET REVIEW Dr. PAuL REZNIKOFF Instructor in Medicine, Cornell University Medical College. Dr. Garrey’s presentation has two important lessons. The first is the explosion of the orthodox ideas of the relation of meals to blood count. Only those who have spent many wasted hours determining the so- called post prandial leucocytosis can appreciate the value of this work. It has been taught, and the teaching has been handed down by successive medical text-books, that following a meal a normal individual develops a} marked increase in the white blood cell count. In fact a test was elab- orated to diagnose this supposed hemoclastic crisis. In the absence of such a rise an individual was sup- posed to have cirrhosis of the liver. Despite the fact that this was not | borne out, the examiners, accepting the dictum of authority, suspected their technique rather than the law. That no such leucocytosis exists is clearly demonstrated by Dr. Gar- rey’s ‘well controlled experiments. The second important contribu- tion is the method of studying a question which is complicated by | variables. It seems obvious that the proper understanding of a bio- logical problem necessitates a con-| trol of as many factors as possible. Such a plan may seem self evident | but the very fact that many former blood studies have not attempted this, makes a reiteration of this car- dinal principle desirable. The un- fortunate feature of Dr. Garrey’s presentation is that it will probably reach physiologists rather than clin- icians who need such instruction | especially. Human subjects are very difficult to control. Human emo- tions make investigation in medical fields much different than the ap- parently uniform material in other biological studies. This greater de- gree of variation complicates mat- ters for the clinical investigator who must in addition contend with the same problem that all research workers meet—the variability (in- sufficiency) of the experimenter. When this problem is carried over into the pathological field many more complications arise. In dis- ease, basal conditions vary for each stage of the disease. However, if it is remembered, Dr. Garrey pointed out in the discussion follow- ing his talk, that pathological varia- tions are superimposed on a basal picture, considerable help ob- tained. The implication is that all patients should be put flat in bed and rested. If this done Suc- cessive blood counts may have a meaning. as is is Members of the Woods Hole sci- entific community may often wonder what the local public thinks of them: The other day one year-rounder. di- gressed from his conversation and naively remarked. “Those scient- ists are queer guys; we sometimes think they're pretty funny, but they certainly are queer. No doubt they mean well. And the queerest ones ly the smartest!” EMBRYOLOGY CLASS | The Embryology Class, along with the other classes conducted at Woods Hole this summer, is the object of a new experiment. The | usual six weeks course has been changed to four weeks of instruc- tion followed by two weeks to be spent by students who so desire in working out some problem of their own choosing or one suggested by the instructor in the special field in which they are most interested. Sev- eral of the students have already started problems which may be car- ried through to the end of the sixth week. At the beginning of the course this summer, the development of |several species of fish was studied under the direction of Dr.° L. Hoadley. A special lecture was given at this time by Dr. P. B. | Armstrong of Cornell Medical Col- lege, on the development of the structure and function of the pro- nephros in Fundulus. Several ex- periments on the fish were started by individuals or groups working together. by various members in drawing out glass needles over a flame in order |to puncture blastomeres in the early cleavage stages of Fundulus. Vari- ous parts of older embryos were also jinjured to find out if there would be any regeneration or change in normal development. hybridization was studied by cross- ing Fundulus heteroclitus with Fun- dulus majalis. Attempts were also made to secure cyclopian embryos and twins by subjecting the eggs to abnormal conditions. Under Dr. Packard’s direction the class took up the problems of |maturation, fertilization, and cell lineage. One evening the majority ‘of the class migrated to the dock with desk lamps and flash lights to lobserve the spawning habits of Nereis. The spawning and the develop- ment of Annelids and Molluscs 'were observed with Dr. B. H. |Graves in charge. Ingenious were | the devices employed to keep trocho- | phores and véligers quiet while they were being laboriously reproduced on library cards. After the study of the Echino- derms with Dr. Rogers, the class devoted two days to experimental work upon the eggs of Arbacia and of Asterias. Much interest was shown in the experiments dealing with artificial parthenogenesis, the effect of the hydrogen ion concen- | de- | tration upon fertilization, the velopment of centrifuged eggs, and the production of Siamese twins. Dr. Plough lectured last week and. conducted the laboratory work on the Coelenterates and Tuni- cates; but Dr. Packard returned as instructor for the first part of this week, when the anthropods were studied. The remainder of the course will be devoted to the ex- perimental work. No regular lectures are planned for the last two weeks, but one or two. talks on special subjects may | possibly be introduced. Much time was passed | Experimental: Laboratory Books for Biology Atwood & Heiss. Educational Biology. By William H. Atwood and Elwood D. Heiss, State Teachers College, Milwaukee. Edited by S. R. Powers, Columbia University. Cloth, $2.75. Laboratory Guide for General Botany. Cc. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden. Cloth, $1.25. Palladin, Livingston. Plant Physiology. 3d American Edition. By V. UT. Palladin, University of Petrograd, The Edition in English by Burton EB. Livingston, Johns Hopkins University. Cloth, $4.00. Gager. By Kostychev. Plant Respiration. By Dr. S. Kostychev, University of Len- ingrad. Translated and Edited by Charles J. Lyon, Dartmouth College. Cloth, $2.50. Stevens. Plant Anatomy. 4th Edition. By William C. Stevens, Uni- versity of Kansas. Cloth, $3.50. Galloway and Welch. Zoology. 4th Edition. By Thomas Walton Gal- loway; Co-reviser, Paul S. Welch, University of Michigan. Cloth, $2.75 Kingsley. Comparative Anatomy. 3rd Edition. By J. S. Kingsley, Uni- versity of Illinois. Cloth, $4.00. Kingsley. Vertebrate Skeleton. By J. S. Kingsley, University of Illinois. Cloth, $6.00 Folsom. Entomology with Special Reference to Its Economic Aspects. 3rd Edition. 3y Justus Watson Folsom, University of Illinois, Cloth, $4.00. Lochhead. Economic Entomology. versity. Cloth, $2.75. Pratt. Manual of Land United States. By Henry S. Patten. The Evolution of the Patten, Dartmouth College. Cloth, $6.00. Wilder. A Laboratory Manual of Anthropometry. Cloth, $3.00. Patten. The Embryology of the Pig. Reserve University. Cloth, $3.50. Patten. The Early Embryology of the Chick. M. Patten, Western Reserve University. Cloth, $2.50. McMurrich. Development of the Human Body. 7th Edition. Playfair MceMurrich, University of Toronto. Cloth, $3.25. By Wm. Lochhead, McGill Uni- and Fresh Water Vertebrate Animals of the Pratt, Haverford College. Cloth, $6.00. Vertebrates and Their Kin. By Win. By Harris H. Wilder, By Bradley M. Patten, Western 3rd Edition. By Bradley By J. Bremer. Textbook of Histology. By J. L. Bremer, Harvard Medical School. Cloth, $6.00. Harman. Laboratory Outlines for Embryology. 2nd Edition. By Mary T. Harman, Kansas State Agricultural College. Cloth, $1.00. P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO. Inc. PUBLISHERS 1012 WALNUT ST. PHILADELPHIA PUBLISHED BY HOEBER , Second Edition in One Year THE PEAKS OF MEDICAL HISTORY AN OUTLINE OF THE EVOLUTION OF MEDICINE By CHARLES L. DANA, A.M.,M.D.,LL.D. Professor of Nervous Diseases, Cornell University Medical College; Ex-President of the New York Academy of Medicine, etc. “The book may be considered one of the best small compends of the history of medi- cine available in English.”"—J. 4.M.A. “For those wishing a brief, interestingly written account of the outstanding facts in the di velopment of medicine from the earliest times to the nineteenth cencury, we heartily recommend this handbook,”—N. Y. State Jour. of Med. “The book is delightfully written, and anyone who reads it will consider his time well spent.”—U. S. Nav.il Med. Bult. I2MO, CLOTH, 105 PAGES, 56 ILLUSTRATIONS OLD AGE $3.00 net THE MAJOR INVOLUTION The Physiology €&¥ Pathology of THE AGING PROCESS spy ALDRED SCOTT WARTHIN, px.pv..o.p.,Li.p. Professor of Pathology and Direcrer of the Pathological Laboratories in the University of Michigan, Ann Arbor “A classic essay.”—J. A. M. A. “Tt would be well if this book were widely read.” —Wisconsin Medical Journal “This book can be strongly recommended not only as a scientific presentation of the -subject but also as a pleasing philosophical discussion of a normal physiological process, ending in acondition that all of us must face—old age.”—N. Eng. Jour. of Med. 12MO, EXTRA CLOTH, OVER 200 PAGES, 13 PLATES AND 16 ILLUS., WITH DECORATIVE INITIALS, ETC. ; - : PAUL B- HOEBER ®* PUBLISHERS 76 FIFTH AVENUE uf NEW YORK Publishers of Annals of Medical History; The American Journal of Surgery; The American Journal of Roentgenology and Radium Therapy; Annals of Roentgenology, etc. $3 00 net INC. 234 THE COLLECTING NET The Effects of Hydrostatic Pressure on Muscle Related SOME PHYSIOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF HYDROSTATIC By Drs. D. J. Epwarps anp M. CartTeLt Department of Physiology, Cornell Medical School | PRESSURE | Dr. Cattell delivered a paper at the evening seminar on July 9 bearing the above title. printed here. A summary by Dr. ¢ Charles D. Snyder, professor of physiology, Johns Hopkins University, are ‘attell together with a review by Dr. Localized pressure applied to muscle or nerve is commonly em- ployed to depress or abolish func- tion in these tissues. This effect is exemplified in the familiar instances of the suspension of conductivity of the nerve fibres during compression, and in the production of A-V block through the application of the Gaskel clamp between the auricles and ventricles. The pressure which will stop conduction need not be high. For example, we have found that a pressure of 125 cm. of mer- cury applied over a distance of one centimeter will block conduction in a majority of fibres of the sciatic nerve of the frog in approximately seven minutes. pressure is applied to a localized region only, beyond the boundaries of which the tissue remains at at- mospheric pressure. where the compressed region of the tissue is unsupported at its boun- daries would clearly result in a de- formation of the tissue and dis- placement of fluid, and this ex- plains adequately the loss in func- tion. The question arises as to the influence of pressure per se on living tissues, 1. e. when acting under con- ditions causing no injury such as obtains when the tissue is com- pletely immersed in a liquid which is subjected to pressure. Under these conditions pressure will be transmitted equally throughout the whole mass of the tissue and there will be no distortion of the struc- ture other than that accompanying the slight decrease in volume. As a consequence of this volume change, however, there will be a change in the relation of the molecules to each other, and possibly also changes in molecular structure. Many of the physical characteristics of a liquid are altered, and these include changes in viscosity and conductiv- ity. A technic has been developed for recording the influence of hydro- static pressure up to 1600 Ibs. per sq. inch on the functional activity of muscular tissues. Records have been obtained of the development of tension, the heat production, the ac- tion current, cardiac rhythmicity and refractory period, under vari- ous degrees of compression. One of the most important phys- iological changes resulting from the application of pressure to muscular tissue is an increase in the power ‘to perform work in response to a single stimulus, which is character- ized as follows: 1. Immediately upon the appli- In these instances | This situation | cation of pressure and continuing until its release there is a marked | PAGE FIVE increase in the tension developed by striated muscle in response to) the stimulus. A similar effect is observed in the rhythmically con- tracting cardiac muscle. teen experiments on the gastroc- nemius muscle of the frog sub-| jected to a pressure of 1000 lbs. per sq. inch, the average tension increase in the single twitch was | 33%. In the ventricle of the turtle similarly treated the stimulation in | 20 experiments averaged 36%. In another series of 16 experiments in which ventricular muscle was sub- jected to a pressure of 1400 lbs. per | sq. inch the tension increased 75%, and in 13 auricular preparations, 50%. Many individual prepara- tions developed a tension under pressure which was over 100% | above the control value. 2. The degree of stimulation is approximately proportional to the pressure within the ranges studied (from atmospheric 1500 Ibs. per sq. inch), i. e. there is a linear relationship between the degree of pressure and the res- ponse. 3. There is an increase initial heat production correspond- ing closely to the increased tension under pressure. change in the efficiency of the mus- cle. We have recently attempted to ob- tain some insight into the mechanism of the pressure effect by studying it in relation to other agencies which produce changes in contraction. One of the most interesting of these is cold. As the temperature is lowered the tension records of car- diac muscle. show two striking changes. In the first place there is a great slowing down of the con- tractile process, both the phases of contraction and relaxation being prolonged several times over the control value. The conditions re- sulting from the application of pressure are very different as the following figures show: Average figures in a series of 20 experiments. 1000 Ibs. Pressure— Turtle ventricle. Tension +35.8% Contractions + 1.7% IRGER GNI on a + 88% Actually the phase of contraction is but very slightly increased under pressure, and this is true in the face of an increase of nearly 36% in the tension developed; thus contrasting with the effect of cold. | It follows that the development of energy occurs at a markedy accel- (Continued ond Page 9) In eigh-| pressure to! in the| There is thus no| a A re a SR SS 1 SS Announcing —A comprehensive textbook for students of plant ecology —A guide for workers in related fields. LANT ECOLOGY By John E. Weaver, Professor of Plant Ecology, University of Nebraska and Re- search Associate in Ecology, Carnegie Institution of Washington and Frederick E. Clements, Associate in Ecology, Car- negie Institution of Washington. 520 Pages, 6 x 9, 262 Illustrations, $5.00 McGraw-Hill Publications in the Agricultural and Botanical Sciences A new and complete treatment of plant ecology, from the standpoint of development, instrumenta- tion and experiment. Some of the more important points about this new text are:— it 10. MIF 370 Seventh Avenue 29.A colored The subject matter of ecology is presented on a physio- logical basis. The book has been written for students beginning a study of ecology and has proven teachable by actual experience. It not only gives a clear discussion of the fundamental principles of ecology but shows the practical applica- tion of these principles and results obtained by their use. It is adapted to a wide range of students in all fields of botany, forestry, grazing crop production, etc., giving practical applications of results obtained by ecological methods. The text is flexible; each chapter is more or less of a unit and by the omission of certain chapters the text is well adapted to a short course. The extensive bibliography with the reference (superior number) inserted at the point of discussion of the par- ticular topic is invaluable to teachers and furnishes a basis for advanced courses and to research workers. There is an unusually large number of illustrations, many of which have never before been published. The results of a considerable amount of research are given for the first time in this new book. The directions for field, greenhouse and laboratory work constitute a manual—practically the contents of two books in one. The use of the common name in conjunction with the scientific names makes the book understandable to a wider range of readers. The book contains all the important recent advances in ecology and points the way to profitable new fields of research, map of the plant formation of North America is included. 8. Emphasis is placed upon the ecology of the individual as well as that of the group. Send for a Copy on Approval Penn. Terminal Building McGraw-Hill Book Company, Ine. New York PAGE SIX THE COLLECTING NET The Collecting Net New Bedford Massachusetts Woods Hole Telephone: Falmouth 1225 A weekly publication concerned with the activities of the Marine Bio- logical Laboratory and of Woods Hole. Ware Cattell Editor Assistant Editors Annaleida S_, Cattell Eugene DuBois Contributing Editors Kathryn Hulme Helen S. Morris Mary Coggeshall Alice A. Gooding Theodore Wyman Business Manager Ilse Michaelis Shirley H. Gray—Printer New Bedford, Massachusetts ANNOUNCEMENT No local news is printed in this number. It will appear on Monday or Tuesday as a supplement to THE CotrectinG Ner. There will be no extra charge made for this supple- ment. This differentiation has been brought about by our rapid growth. It is the natural course of the de- velopment of a healthy embryo! Our Employment Bureau Last year THe Cotrectinc Net was successful in finding positions individuals — and it wishes again to offer its services in for several this direction. Any person con- nected with the laboratory desiring a position is invited to file his The statement should be a detailed one, noting the type of position desired, the salary expected, experience and Any applica- tions filed will be regarded as strict- ly confidential, the privilege of ex- amination being granted only to those individuals who are looking qualifications at our office. other relevant facts. for assistance. It is interesting to note that last season there was a demand for per- haps three times as many applicants | as were available. Our Advertisers Tue Correctinc Net Scholar- ship Fund should have the whole- hearted support of every member of Each year it gives financial aid to five young men and $100.00 grants to carry out research prob- the laboratory. women in the form of lems in biology at this laboratory. Last Fall a large fraction of the total sum was contributed by THE CottectinG Net from its earnings We wonder if our readers realize the extent to con- Without their as- sistance not only would there be no surplus, but worse still, no maga- Its publication is made pos- during the summer. which our advertisers tributing to it. are zine. sible only by their support. We wish here to express our sin- cere appreciation to the following firms who are this year contribut- ing to the support of THe Cor- LectinG Net Scholarship Fund: McGraw-Hill Book Company | Arthur H. Thomas Company Paul B. Hoeber, Inc. Bausch & Lomb Optical Company P. Blakiston’s Son & Company Clay-Adams Company Eimer & Amend Be eeitz lnc: Medical Life Press Spencer Lens Company Will Corporation Wistar Institute Carl Zeiss, Inc. General Biological Supply House Cambridge Instrument Company Kny-Scheerer Corporation John Wiley & Sons, Inc. International Equipment Company Kewaunee Manufacturing Company M. B. L. Supply Department Southwestern Biological Supply House New York Biological Supply Co. Members of the laboratory thus owe triple thanks to these firms be- cause : (1) Each one is advancing the work of the Marine Biological Laboratory. (2) Each one is giving financial aid to fellow workers at the laboratory. (3) Each one is contributing to the support of, and therefore together making possible, the ING NET. In view of the circumstances as outlined above we feel no com- punction in strongly urging every member of the laboratory to re- ciprocate by supporting these firms by the purchase of their scientific apparatus and books. Read their advertisements. They contain inter- esting and useful information. The advance of research is often times dependent upon the development of new types of apparatus, and upon the increase in the accuracy of ex- isting instruments of precision. Might it not be as correct to say that |scientific research is as much de- pendent upon scientific instrument makers as to state that scientific in- strument makers are dependent up- lon science for their well-being? Any worker in the field of scientific research would soon become obso- lete if he failed to follow fairly close- ly the new apparatus and the new books which make their appearance monthly, or perhaps even weekly on the market. Reading scientific advertisements is important in the same way that reading scientific periodicals is important. Incidentally, may we ask our readers to make the statement that they saw the announcement in when they write to firms advertis- ing in our paper. Any member of the laboratory may insert an inch announcement in the advertising columns of THe Cottectinc Net for fifty cents. This is less than half the charge made to an outsider. publication of THe CoLLecr-: question in Tur Coriectine NET, | ae ee es ee eee Owing to circumstances beyond our control it has been found quite impossible to include in this number the supplement containing the list of serial holdings of the library at the Marine Biological Laboratory. Our printer promises us, however, that he can have the work completed soon. In the introductory note to Pro- fessor Whitman’s article in the last number of THE CoLLectinG NET it was wrongly stated that Professor Whitman died in 1905. We knew that his death did not occur until 1910; but the last number was edited under adverse circumstances and this error crept in. MRS. MORGULIS LOANS SIX RUSSIAN DRESSES Tue CorvectinG Net is indebt- ed to Mrs. Sergius Morgulis for her kindness in loaning the picturesque Russian dresses which were worn by the ushers for “Ten Days that Shook the World” on Thursday evening. WOOD’S HOLE VERSES The poem entitled ‘““Nonamessett’,’ which appeared in the last number of THe CotiectinG NET, is from a little book of verse published under the title of “Nonamessett and Other Verses” by Eleanor Addison. Copies of this book may be obtained at the office of THe COLLECTING Net for seventy five cents. Correction On page 12 of the July 13th number of THe CoLttectinGc NET two lines in the poem ‘Nonamessett’ ‘should read as follows,—verse 5 jline 2, ‘The tide-pools gleam in the moon’; last verse, line 1, “Over to Nonamessett’. Dr. W. A. Wolf has arrived to take up his work in the chemical room as assistant director. CORRESPONDENCE Your Funny Net! To the Editor: How hard you find it to be funny when you want to be funny, but oh! how easily are you funny by mis- take! In the first number, for ex- ample, take the heading of your coast guard story which is “Areletha and other boats rescued’. In the account we learn that the Areletha was “‘on fire fore and aft the | doomed ship so greatly de-| molished nothing could be done 1 nine shots fired into her she sank in two fathoms of water. Excelsior ! In the second number, for ex- ample, take the vese of Mrs. Ad- dison that you reprinted. Accord- ing to your version ‘The tide pools gleam in the rustling bushes.” In reality the author had the “‘tide pools gleaming in the moon”. They are more often found gleaming there. R. A. CIRCULATION AFFECTED BY PROLONGED STANDING THE REACTION OF THE HUMAN CIRCULATION IN PROLONGED STANDING By Dr. Assy H. TURNER Professor of Physiology, Mt. Holyoke College Dr. Turner delivered a paper at the evening seminar on July 9 bearing the above title. The author's summary and a rewiew by Dr. Norman Llummer, instructor in medicine at Cornell University Medical School, are printed here, Studies have been made on healthy young women which show that there is a marked contrast be- tween the well-known adaptions of the human circulation to the de- mands of exercise and to those of prolonged, quiet standing. The con- spicious changes in exercise are a large pulse rise, more or less commensurate with the rise in met- abolism, a large systolic rise, a widened pulse pressure, all indica- tive of a greatly augmented circula- tory rate by which the active tis- sues are flooded with blood. In contrast the maintenance of quiet standing is accompanied by a pulse rise out of proportion to the work done, but by little or no systolic changes and a marked diasto- lic rise which narrows the pulse pressure. This indication of a largely decreased circulatory min- ute volume, substantiated as it is by many determinations of that quantity by respiratory methods, is in harmony with the not infre- quent occurrence of dizziness and and even fainting on prolonged quiet standing. Helmreich of Vienna has dis- tinguished two kinds of rise in heart rate, one, “dynamic”, corresponding to the metabolic need for more blood, the other, “static”, evident when gravity puts the circulation at a dis- advantage. The disparity between metabolic need and circulatory ad- justment in situations where gravity is involved has been shown by two recent series of determinations, one by Miss Isabel Newton at Mount Holyoke College, one in progress at Woods Hole. Young women on a tilting table show a rise in metabol- ism above the basal reclining value of only 5.8% when they are held at an angle of 62°, the steepest at which they still feel entirely supported by the table. When tilted to the vertical position, the standing metabolism measured 18.5% above the reclining metabolism. We should expect the circulatory effects of such rea- tively small metabolic changes to be very slight, looking at the changes as exercise. Instead we find an ex- tensive circulatory readjustment, a rise in heart rate for 62° of 25 beats or +30% and a decrease in pulse pressure of 8.5mm Hg or —21% on the average. In the vertical position the changes may be the same ( New- ton’s average) or even greater in the Woods Hole series where long- er times have been used. (Continued on Page 11) The Farm As An Adjunct to Biological Research The Effingham B. Morris Bio- logical Farm of The Wistar Insti- tute of Anatomy and Biology offers }| to a limited number of investigators unique opportunities for mental work on amblystoma and other fresh water forms. The Spring House Laboratory with its ample supply of cold (54°) water during the summer and cool operating rooms furnishes the ex- act conditions required for such work. | The old colonial farm house, built partly of stone and partly of }| red and black bricks, with its many attractive features peculiar to the country, has been restored and fur- nished with comforts of a modern home, and is open for men pur- suing researches at the Institute. As its capacity is limited, prefer- ence will be given to those engaged in research which must be carried on at the Farm. Available space, however, may be occupied by mem- bers of the staff or laboratory guests who are working in the Institute’s laboratories in Philadelphia. The Farm House will be open all the year. The farm is located four miles from Bristol, Bucks County, Penn- sylvania, thirty miles from Philadel- experi- I Sue, COLLECTING NET EMBRYOLOGY COURSE PREPARES INVESTIGATORS FOR RESEARCH 3y Dr. C. G. Rocers. Professor of Comparative Physiology, Oberlin College Visitors to the Marine Biological Laboratory, not familiar with all the phases of its history, have at times expressed surprise, and have ques- | tioned why an institution claiming to be devoted to research in biology should sponsor more or less formal courses of instruction. Such queries doubtless arise because of the feel- ing that a course here must be the same in content and objectives as| a course given in some inland col- | lege or university laboratory. For the past forty years the Ma- rine Biological Laboratory has been devoted to the extension of human knowledge in the field of biology. During this period there have been marked changes of opinion as to the direction in which research activities might find best expression, and as to the methods of investigation | which might prove to be most fruit- ful. Subjects which were of para- mount interest in the earlier days of the laboratory make little or no appeal to the imagination of the worker of the present day, even though the matters then under in- vestigation have never been worked through to a satisfactory conclusion. As each problem has been attacked by its group of investigators there has finally come a time when there has seemed to arise a barrier be- yond which it was impossible to go. And it has happened that in a good number of cases the barrier has | been a lack of knowledge of physics or chemistry, or mathematics, or phia, six miles south of Trenton. Morning and evening trains will be met at Bristol by the Farm automobile. Excellent train service is maintained by the Pennsylvania Railroad between West Philadel- phia and Bristol. | Rates for board and room at the Farm House are from $16.00 to $18.00 per week according to loca- tion of room. This rate includes taxi service to and from trains reg- ularly met at Bristol. Board without room is $12.00 per week for men engaged in research at the Institute’s laboratories. The number accepted will be limited by the seating capacity of the Dining Room. Residents of the Farm House may invite guests under the usual club rules when space is available. Arrangements for Residence at the Farm House should be made at the ADMINISTRATION OFFICE of The Wistar Institute 36th Street and Woodland Avenue Philadelphia biology. — > Chere is a sense in which we may |carry over from the embryology | laboratory an expression of de- velopment as applied to the growth of the Marine Biological Labora- tory. It is an ontogeny. It rep- resents a series of reactions and in- teractions between its various com- ponents, and between these and its environment. One may go so far as to say that the picture which the laboratory shows at any particular period in its development is a re- sultant of all the antecedent em- phases in biological interest. The chief aim of the Laboratory is the advancement of the knowledge of biology. The existence of the various courses. Invertebrates, Em- bryology, Physiology, Protozoology, Botany, can be justified only as ‘these contribute to the main func- tion of the laboratory. It is nat- ural that during the forty years of the life of the Laboratory there should have been different concep- tions of its chief objective and of the way in which this might be re- alized. Some have felt that salva- tion (biologically speaking) must come through a study of morphol- ogy; some, through embryology; some, through physiology; some, through the integration of all lines of attack upon the living organism. At all times there have been those who have kept in mind the part which the various courses might play in the work of the laboratory. In the minds of some there has been the feeling that specific courses are unnecessary or even unwarrant- ed in such an institution as this. There has been expressed the no- tion that the best way for any student to make a contribution to biological knowledge is to begin in- vestigation. As against this feeling there has been expressed the con- viction that the investigator needs, in order to insure the success of his efforts, a background of informa- tion of animal forms, their struc- tures, their development, their habits of life, their physiology. During the process of acquiring this background of information the student discovers what is known concerning the or- ganisms studied, and even more im- portant, what gaps there are in our information, which need to be filled in before the fabric of our knowl- edge can be complete, and the types of animals which are especially like- ly to be suitable materials for the study of certain problems. It is not necessary at this time to write a history of the Embryology Course. That is a subject wholly worthy of record in the proper time and place. The Course was start- ed in 1894 and, according to the statement of Dr. Whitman who was at that time the director of the Lab- |oratory, was “designed as a prep- aration for beginning investigation. The aims will therefore be, not only to master the details of develop- ment, but also to acquire a thorough knowledge of the methods.” (Here followed a catalog of the methods). The materials studied consisted of the fish, frog, and chick. During the immediately succeed- ing years essentially the same an- nouncement was made. In the an- nouncement for the summer of 1898 is the statement “Special emphasis will be laid upon experimental methods.” Among the topics men- ;tioned were fertilization, cleavage, the general features of development of vertebrates and invertebrates. In the next year Fundulus was men- tioned as a type which would be studied, and as a special attraction, “Professor Wilson’s slides of Ma- turation of Nereis.” During this summer methods were specially em- phasized, one half of the time of the course being given to observa- tion and one half to the considera- tion of methods. In the year 1905 it was announced that the work of the Embryology Course would be Lire Htsrortes, and that “All of the work will be based upon the study of living ma- terial.” In the year 1907 the course was omitted, but was restored in (Continued on Page 8) PAGE ELEVEN >>, |+%tC|}|}|:COffDFfDay ZEISS MAGNIFIERS The price of the best magni- fiers is within the reach of everyone, the difference in performance between the best and ordinary magnifiers is considerable. The following are particularly popular :— APLANATIC FOLDING MAGNIFIERS 6x, 8x, 10x..............66.50 each ANASTIGMATIC FOLDING MAGNIFIERS NGxe 2 Ose ix $11.00 each Prices f. 0. b. New York All of the above magnifiers have excellent definition to the edge of the field of view and the image is free from color defects. Descriptive literature, also listing other types of magnifiers, will be sent on request. A selection of Zeiss Instruments will be ON EXHIBITION at Woods Hole July 29 - Aug. 3 CARL ZEISS, Inc. 485 Fifth Avenue New York Pacific Coast Branch: 728 South Hill Sreet, Los Angeles. PAGE TWELVE For Biology Turtox Products include APPARATUS FOR BIOLOGY BOTANICAL MATERIAL CHARTS COLLECTING DISSECTIONS EMBRYOLOGICAL MATERIAL INJECTED MATERIAL For comparative anatomy JEWELL MODELS LANTERN SLIDES LIFE HISTORIES MICROSCOPIC SLIDES MUSEUM PREPARATIONS PARASITOLOGY MATERIAL SKELETONS STAINS AND REAGENTS TAXIDERMY ZOOLOGICAL MATERIAL EQUIPMENT Let us send you a set of the six Turtox Biology Catalogs The Sign of the Turtox Pledges Absolute Satisfaction General Biological Supply House (Incorporated) 761-763 East 69 Place Chicago, Hlinois COMING! Another Russian Picture A Comedy this time Reserve Thursday Night, August 1 THE COLLECTING NET EMBRYOLOGY COURSE PREPARES INVESTIGATORS FOR RESEARCH (Continued from Page 7) the following year, and has been a regular offering since that time. From 1908 on, the work of the course has been in the hands of men who have felt that the study of the living material—in this laboratory— is more important than the study of sections. The real stock in trade of the investigator is the sum total of the information and method (associat- ed, of course, with a lively imagin- | ation), which he can bring to bear upon the solution of the problem be- fore him. It is altogether too well known that investigators in various phases of biological research have been subject to criticism because of | some lack in their preparation in physics, or chemistry, or mathemat- ics, or even in biology. may become most painfully noted when a man of some experience and training transfers his energies to some field of investigation which is | to him new and untried. Just as there have heen fads in the line of work in which the investigators of a given year have been interested, there have also been fads in the forms of material which have been | used in the solving of the various | sorts of problems. While the egg of Arbacia is, for example, a most admirable cell for the study of cer- tain phenomena it is by no means the only egg worthy of considera- tion. One comes to question the resourcefulness of investigators as a group when he notices how lim- ited they are in their choices of ma- terials ranges of problems. The Embryology Course has sought to give a background of in- formation and of method which might be of real service to the in- vestigator in the selection of ma- terial best suited for his particular problem. Such information serves two purposes: it gives to the in- vestigator the advantage of being able to select material best suited to his purpose, and it tends to con- serve the supply of available ma- terial, by distributing the work of investigation over a wider range of animal forms. It has been the aim of the Em- bryology Course to serve the re- search interests of the Laboratory | by giving to a group of advanced students, selected because of their promise as future investigators, first, a background of the facts of development of a wide range of an- imal fundamental concepts of the devel- opmental side of biology; third, some appreciation of and exposure to active biological investigation ; and fourth, an appreciation of the fact that there is still much to be done. The subject matter of the course is presented in the form of lectures, and in studies upon living materials in the laboratory. The Such a lack | for the studies upon wide | | forms cannot | tion associated | places forms: second, some of the| conduct of the work causes it to take on in the largest possible de- gree the nature of research. In these studies are traced the develop- mental histories of representatives of all the metazoan phyla from the Coelenterates to the Ascidians and Pisces. The laboratory studies are made not upon dead, stained and sectioned materials, but ing, dynamic, developing structures whose developmental processes can be traced from day to day. One who has not studied have any conception of the intense fascina- with watching the living eggs go through their pro- of maturation, fertilization, cleavage, gastrulation, formation of free-swimming embryo, differentia- tion and organ formation. The study of the formation of asters, of cleavage spindles, of the division cesses and migration of cromosomes, and | the division of the egg cell into two or more cells, are processses studied | each year and which furnish to those students a siimulus further inquiry into the whys and hows of life. work of the course the morpholog- ical observations are accompanied by experimental studies. The stu- dent has the opportunity to secure, therefore, an account of normal de- | velopment associated with an ex- perimental analysis of the facts ob- served. No amount of study of fixed materials can give to the young investigator the thrill associ- ated with the observations upon these dynamic activities. Nor should the fact be lost sight of that the ma- terials studied in the laboratory here are materials which can not be studied in any inland laboratory. Many of the young men and wo- men who have the greatest aptitude for the research career secure their college training in institutions where the research idea is wholly un- known. The greatest stimulus to research is to see or have a part in the research process. Like measles, it is contagious. It is this form of contagion which the Embryology Course seeks to cultivate. During the progress of the work of the summer session every oppor- tunity is taken to point out to those taking the course not only the ad- vances that have been made in our knowledge of the developmental processes in the different groups, but to indicate as well the points that are still not understood, the where information is still lacking, and to suggest points which need to be reinvestigated in the light of newer information and more improved methods of work. One of the functions of the Em- bryology Course is to keep the feet of investigators somewhat upon the ground. The enthusiasms of dis- covery frequently lead to the aban- donment of a problem before it is Page 9) (Continued on upon liv- | the living | adequate | toward | In all phases of the | Look for our Exhibit rs August Ist to 12th LECTURE AEE SPALTEHOLZ TRANSPARENT PREPARATIONS HUMAN AND ZOOLOGICAL MODELS CHARTS SKELETONS ERG? MR. J. A. KYLE in charge e CLAY-ADAMS CO. IMPORTERS AND WHOLESALE DISTRIBUTORS 119 EAST 24th STREET NEW YORK CITY THE COLLECTING NET PAGE NINE CATTELL SUMMARY (Continued from Page 5) energy occurs at a markedly accel- erated rate in the muscle contract- ing under pressure. The phase of relaxation, on the other hand. is definitely prolonged. This, how- ever, we believe, is not a primary pressure effect, since the stronger contraction occurring under pressure might well require a longer period to overcome the visco-elastic proper- ties of the muscle and restore it to the resting conditions. The second effect on cardiac muscle of cooling is to increase the tension developed in response to a stimulus. A few experiments have been carried out in which the combined stimulating action of cold, and pressure on the tension has been studied. The following is a typical example : Exp. 35 Turtle ventricle Stimulation Pressure (1000 Ibs.) . 43% Cold GiG2G rn. =. 35% Pressure and cold 64% Evidently the pressure effect is largely superimposed upon that of | the low temperature. Recently we have carried out ex- periments on pressure stimulation in relation to the action of epine- phrine, which alone causes an in- crease in the tension developed by cardiac muscle. The results are given in the following table in which the figures represent the average in- crease over the control value: 1400lbs. applied to Turtle Heart Ventricle Auricle (16 expts.) (13 expts.) 75% 50% 37% 12% Pressure Epinephrine Pressure and Epinephrine 121% 70% It will be seen that the simultane- ous action of epinephrine and pres- sure results in an even greater stim- ulation than that obtained by the two separately. In other words pressure is more effective in the presence of epinephrine stimulation. It is remarkable that the muscular machine will allow an increase of over 100% above normal in the tension developed, and an interest- ing point for future investigation will be to determine the limits to which the mechanism may be pushed by pressure. KEWAUNEE LABORATORY FURNITURE Here are two of our Laboratory Furniture scientific purposes. designed when experiments quently made. and tests convenient. No. 1005 is a Biology Laboratory Table with cupboards for microscopes and other apparatus or materials; drawers for drawings, note, etc. Write for prices. interesting chapter which these au- ‘others, have injected into the new | physiology, a chapter whose caption many pieces of for No. 15005 is a Pri- vate Laboratory Desk of especial fitness are fre- It is very compact and REVIEW 3y Dr. CHARLES D. SNYDER Professor of Physiology, Johns Hopkins University The work reported by Drs. Ed- wards and Cattell on the effect of increased hydrostatic pressures up- on the physiological activities of muscle adds another section to that thors, probably more than any appropriately may be styled piezo- | physiology. The clear-cut body of data our authors present (a result largely due to the beautiful technique they have developed and their clean me- chanical set-up) shows that both skeletal and cardiac muscle give greater responses to electrical stim- ulation when under higher than when under the lower hydrostatic pressure of one atmosphere. It may be permitted the present reviewer to state somewhat more at length as to what physical and phy- sical-chemical changes the system (a surviving muscle suspended in Ringer’s solution) must undergo: when suddenly subjected to a (Continued on Page 10) EMBRYOLOGY COURSE PREPARES FOR RESEARCH (Continued from Page 8) completely solved. The fabric of our knowledge is a veritable patch- work. We need occasionally to be reminded, or to remind ourselves that not all has yet been done. So we are drawn back again and again to problems whose solution has so far eluded us. The resurrection of problems, the picking up of old lines of thought and of rejuvenating them are valuable functions of the course. Question may be raised as to whether the Embryology Course has made its proper contribution of men and women to the research ac- tivities of biology. To mention names in a report of this sort seems hardly fitting, but it may be stated without any fear of successful con- tradiction that an examination of the rolls of the Embryology classes reveals a long list of men and wom- en who have attained scientific and educational distinction. No. LABORATORY FURNITURE G f EXPERTS C. G. CAMPBELL, Pres. and Gen. Mgr. 231 Lincoln St., Kewaunee, Wis. Chicago Office: New York Office: 14 E. Jackson Blvd. 70 Fifth Avenue Offices in Principal Cities 15005 PRECISION CLAMPS SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR USE IN PHYSIOLOGICAL WORK ) ri Pine Be I yt anton i 8027 8027-A Jp Se 8029-A 8029-C $028-B Code Word Marot 8027. Clamp, Slow Motion, especially designed for use with recording apparatus, etc 8027-A. Clamp, small of brass. For holding round rods at right angles. Will take rods up to 10 mm diameter; also flat strips or a glass plate Clamp, Precision, right-angle, adjustable. For use on upright supports up to 12 mm diameter. Horizontal jaw takes rods up to 10 mm di- ameter. The adjustment by thumb screw against the opposing screw provides convenient means of adjusting writing levers, etc. A of -70 — Marrn 8028. 6.00 Martj 8029. brass, precision clamp, Rotating on a be fastened at Clamp, Rotating. finished in Bakelite and nickel. common axis, the clamps can any angle in relation to each other by screw “A’’. Rods therefore, can be held at any angle u ol on Maryz with two perforations by which rods can be clamped by screw ‘“‘A’”’ in parallel pairs, at any angle between the pairs. Each clamp is fur- nished with an extra interchangeable pair of jaws. Unthreaded or upper jaw contains holes 3 mm and 4 mm diameter, and the threaded or lower jaw contains holes 5 mm and 6 mm di- ameter. In the extra pair of jaws, the upper jaw contains holes 5 and 6 mm diameter, and the lower j diameter jaw contains holes 3 and 4 mm 6.00 Marzs 8029-B. Ditto, large size, with unthreaded or upper jaw with holes 6 and 7 mm diameter, and the threaded or lower jaw with holes 8 and 9 mm diameter, In the extra pair of jaws, the upper jaw contains holes 6 mm and 8 mm diameter, and the lower jaw 10 mm diameter contains holes 6 mm and MIO OCC dig, Pc S-b16.6 sree, Simoes Masav 8029-C. Clamp, Prismatic, of brass, finished in Bake- lite and nickel. For rods from 6 to 12 mm diameter, held either parallel or at right angles. The body of the clamp is set at 450 to the pris- matic jaws, so that a 5 mm rod used in the tubulation can be firmly held at 450 to either the vertical or horizontal plane Masbe ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY Retail—Wholesale—Export LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U. S. A. Cable Address “Balance”, Philadelphia to each other, parallel in different planes or parallel in the same plane. Takes rods from (Ve BE) Gooheal GChehoM er ho ono oC oan eH COS ae 8029-A. Clamp, Rotating, consisting of two jaws, each NATURAL HISTORY SPECIMENS The Supply Department has recently secured a fine lot of Euplectella and also Ammocoetes, the larvae of the lamprey eel, as well as other interesting forms. A material and large stock of zoological, microscope slides on sale. botanical Orders solicited now for fall delivery. For further information apply at the Supply Department Office. Catalogues on request. PAGE TEN THE COLLECTING NET Tested Purity E&A CHEMICALS Represent the highest quality C. P. Chemicals obtainable. They have been carefully checked in our testing laboratory and bear labels showing the results of their analyses. Many are of American origin, but we draw from the best products of the world, insuring the user the highest purity at a reasonable price. For analytical chemicals, specify E. & A. Pp grade. EIMER & AMEND Est. 1851 Inc, 1897 Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and Chemical Reagents NEW YORK, N. Y. Third Ave., 18th to 19th St. H-lon ‘Colorimetry | The Bausch & Lomb H-Ion Colori- meter is built according to the design of Prof. A. B. Hastings of the Uni- versity of Chicago and the principle used by Mines (1920) and Gillespie (1923). -This model is based on the standard Duboeco Colorimeter, ad- ditional cups being provided for the use of both alkaline and acid forms of the indicator in either light path. Further auxiliary cups provide for the balancing of body color according to the Walpole technique, in cases where | such interference prevents the match- ing of the colors due to the indicators. Send for your copy of “Hydro- gen-Ion Colorimetry” in which 1s a detailed description of the in- strument together with a bibli- ography. and an article by the B. & L. Scientific Bureau. Bausch & Lomb Optical Co. 699 St. Paul Street Rochester, N. Y. SNYDER SUMMARY (Continued from Page 9) |change from one to 60 or 100 at- |mospheres pressure. (1) There will be probably some slight in- /crease in solubilities say of carbo- hydrates; especially will this be probable in the immediate neigh- borhood of glycogen particles where there may be an approach to satur- ation of solution. (2) There will |be an increased concentration of all | the substances dissolvevd in the sys- |tem, within as well as without the ‘muscle, on account of the “‘ficti- |tious” decrease of volume caused by the compression. This sudden increase in concentration, although | it may not be large, may still be very | effective in improving the muscle re- sponses if the concentration change | reaches the contractile points (Kon- traktions Orte. Meyerhof) of the muscle fibers. Very high pressures, 300 to 700 atmospheres or more, as Ebbecke showed, act per se as a stimulating agent, and cause all degrees of con- traction in muscle varying from the {simple twitch to reversible contrac- /tures, and finally to irreversible contractures and rigor mortis. In |explaining his results Ebbecke con- |cludes that the physical-chemical |factor affected and most probably responsible for the stimulating ac- tion is the sudden increase in con- centration of the weakly dissociable electrolytes present in muscle. Since diffusion velocity function of osmotic and osmotic pressure relation of molar and ionic concen- tration, one sees that these processes may also be subjected to some change. (4+) Whereas water and dilute solutions of salt in water show a decrease of viscosity with increase of hydrostatic pressure at temperatures below 30° C., it must be remembered that other fluids suffer an increase of viscosity under increase of hydrostatic pressure, and that, “In general the largest pressure effects are for those sub- stances with the most complicated molecules” (Bridgman). Therefore, until we know whether only simple iG pressure a dilute salt solution, or whether large complicated molecules con- taining other colloidal fluids are forced through small passageways, we cannot say whether or not the phenomena of muscle contract- ing under high hydrostatic pressures support the contribution of Gasser and Hill to the theory of muscle |contraction. (5) There will be |changes doubtless in velocities of some of the chemical reactions in- volved in muscle contraction. Ernst Cohen has shown. that ethyl acetate is saponified by sodium hydrate at an increased rate of 12 per cent by increasing the pressure 500 atmo- spheres, and that the deionizing ac- tion of the hydrobromic acid upon bromic acid is decreased about 5 per cent by a similar increase of pressure. (6) A word should be said about the possible direct mechanical effect of a sudden increase of hydrestatic pressure. I refer to a possible massaging effect. Indeed a sudden increase in pressure on all sides of the muscle must have some such effect resulting in an accelerated passage of the less as well as of the more permeable substances through the semi-per- meable membranes, from the outer to the inner parts of the organ, from interstitial spaces into the sarco- plasma, and possibly from sarco- plasma into the fibrilles and the ul- timate contractile elements them- selves. If so, the muscle would probably be put in a temporarily improved state, a state in which its irritability is increased and its power to shorten and to relax is in- creased. But only temporarily; and hence the condition of increased contraction, observed when the pressure is first applied, ought grad- ually to fade away and the muscle to behave finally as it did at pres- sure of one atmosphere, or pos- sibly not so well. Our authors I believe report elsewhere that the facilitating effect of high pressure is of short lasting duration, and not sustained as long as one may wish to keep up a given high level of pressure. From which we must conclude that increasing hydrostatic pressure per se probably does not change the properties of muscle but that the effects described may be due to the mere mechanical squeez- ing effect occasioned by the sudden change of external pressure, an ef- fect that is bound to disappear just as soon as the disturbance produced among the physical-chemical equi- libria has subsided and new equilib- ria have been established again. The fact that, when the muscles are re- turned to atmospheric pressure, they respond less well for a little while, than they did before they were treated to the high pressure, seems to favor this massaging conception. For decompression would reverse the effects, leaving the muscle with its fatigue products, but no new supply of fatigue-removing sub- stancs. However all this may be, the re- cent results of the authors’ experi- ments showing that epinephrin com- bined with high pressure (nearly 100 atmospheres) enables heart muscle to do more than twice as much work, as it does under one atmosphere pressure and _ without epinephrin, is a fact too striking and too important in both its practical and theoretical implications for us to be content with all these meager hints at an explanation. A satisfac- tory explanation will be had only after a systematic experimental study has been made of the effects of increased hydrostatic pressure on all such processes as are known to be concerned in the act of muscle contraction and that can be studied separately in an isolated state, and yet imitating as nearly as possible the conditions in the muscle. Par- allel with these studies the line of physiological experiments indicated by the authors of course should be continued. THE COLLECTING NET PAGE TURNER SUMMARY (Continued from Page 6) The upright positions certainly do not call for a restriction in the cir- culating blood, yet that is what the data indicate. It is apparent that the obstacle of gravity to the venous return from a large part of the body in the erect position is a serious one. | Indications of blood stagnation have been found by Miss Florence Haynes in the average increase of leg volume, to a point above the knee, of 175 cc by 15 minutes of quiet standing. A Mount Holyoke series by her and a Woods Hole series now in progress also show the possibility of preventing a part of the standing changes in pulse and pressure by abdominal support, thus lesssening the tendency to splanchnic stagnation. Previous inferences regarding the modus operandi of these changes do not seem adequate or convincing. Further light is sought. The bio- logical lateness of the erect position is certainly suggestive. REVIEW By Dr. Norman PLUMMER Instructor in Medicine, Cornell University Medical School Dr. Turner’s experimental work on the reaction of the human circu- lation to prolonged standing has a definite bearing on problems of clinical and practical importance. Almost every individual has ex- perienced the feeling of dizziness during prolonged, quiet standing, particularly when undertaken be- fore meals. Fainting frequently oc- curs when some slight sensory or psychic stimulus is added. For ex- ample, medical students and nurses frequently faint when standing to watch an operation; and_ patients are apt to keel over when standing for a blood-test or venesection. These observations have been casually noted by many clinical in- vestigators, but no explanation has been given. Dr. Turner has noted these symptoms and has recorded a marked increase in pulse rate, out of proportion to that produced by the muscular effort expended, and also a decrease in pulse pressure, which is opposite to the effect ob- tained in exercise. The circulatory response follow- ing exercise and the ingestion of food has been quite adequately ex- plained, but the response to stand- ing cannot be completely explained in the same way. The force of gravity which causes blood stagna- tion and diminished blood volume must be considered. Dr. Turner has reported the in- crease of leg volume to a_ point above the knee of 175cc. in 15 min- utes. If one considers both ex- tremities and the abdomen, particu- larly the splanchnic area, there is probably a stagnation of 1000 cc. or more of blood, which means that the body is forced to carry on its activity with a markedly diminished blood volume. In other words, there is an internal hemorrhage of the amount noted. Dr. W. B. Cannon has observed the same symptoms and pulse and blood pressure changes recorded by Dr. Turner in traumatic hemorrhage and shock, and he believes that the diminished cardiac output is the primary cause. The writer has observed and ex- | perienced the same symptoms _fol- lowing the removal of from 500 cc. to 1000 ce. of blood. The donor is frequently dizzy and light-headed for a long period; the pulse is some- times thready and rapid. Women in pregnancy frequently notice dizziness upon standing when normally the same period of stand- ing gives no symptoms. This may be explained by increased stagnation due to pressure upon the iliac ves- sels. It would be interesting to note whether the blood pressure is the same in the lower extremities as in the arm after a period of quiet standing. The Schneider test is based upon similar changes in posture but the readings are made immediately. This means that the muscular exer- cise is a great factor, and as Dr. Turner has shown may in some cases give contrary figures to what he obtains. The Schneider test gives more nearly the same results as are obtaind from the various ex- ercise tolerance tests while in Dr. Turner’s test the rived is quite different and very significant. PHOTOGRAPHIC SERVICE IS INITIATED AT LABORATORY | Arrangements have been made to provide for certain types of photo- graphic work which in the past have been needed within the Laboratory. For this season the services of Mr. E. R. Apgar will be available to in- vestigators engaged in work at the Laboratory. Facilities are available to make lantern slides, contrast prints and a limited class of general photographic work, such as experiments in pro- gress, copying records, etc. For this photographic work labor and materials will be furnished at cost. Orders may be left at the Ap- paratus Room, 216 Brick Bldg. A limited supply of cameras for photo-micro-graphic work together with safelights and chemicals is ‘available to workers who prefer to do part or all of their own photog- raphy. Dark rooms are limited chiefly to experimental work but may be obtained for short periods on request. Plates, films and paper or other photographic supplies may be ordered for individuals mailable to them charges collect. information de-| RESEARCH ant PHOTOMICROGRAPHIC 16mm Immersion) 12X and matic objectives: and 2mm (Oil Oculars; 6X, key N. A. N. A. in mahogany cabinet 20X; MICROSCOPE MODEL “ABM” 0.30, 8mm N.A. 1.32; Perilplanatic For Binocular and Monocular Vision Microscope “A B M- 35a’ with side fine ad- justment equipped with ball-bearing sliders as guarantee against lost motion, graduated drum at fine adjustment for measuring thickness of specimen within 0.001 mm; complete illumi- nating apparatus ‘“b” with aplanatic con- denser N.A. 1.40 and two iris diaphragms, one mounted to sep- arate carrier for oblique illumination by rack and pinion; binocular and monocular body tubes; large rotary me- chanical stage; quad- ruple nosepiece; achro- 0.65, 4mm N.A. 0.95 Compensating with lock and $503.00 10% Discount to Institutions, Write tor Pamphlet No. 1141 (CN) E.. LEV salieie: 60 EAST 10TH STREET NEW YORK, N. Y. Laboratory, Museum and Lecture Room Supplies, Natural History Specimens We carry a large Anatomical and Biological Models and Preparations; stock of Scientific Apparatus, Instruments; Natural History Specimens, Skeletons, Skulls; Glass Jars, Microscopes and Accessories, etc. New Asta absolutely Incubators, our reliable regulating system, insuring the application. chamber. Special circulars Sterilizers and Wassermann Baths, patented uniform heat circulating heating describing with heat conditions throughout system and these apparatus, on We shall be glad to send our New General Catalog and Natural- ists’ Supplies Catalog and other literature upon request and furnish any other information that may be desired, VADSCO SALES CORPORATION DIVISION KNY-SCHEERER CORPORATION 10-14 West 25th Street, New York City Dept. of Natural Science, G. Lagai, Ph. D: ELEVEN PAGE TWELVE THE COLLECTING NET AMONG THE 40 NOTABLE AMERICAN BOOKS OF 1928 Selected by THE AMERICAN LIBRARY ASSOCIA- TION for the International Institute of Intellectual Co- operation of the League of Nations for inclusion ina World List of Notable Books is - THE BRAIN BROOM APE. TPO: Nees A Contribution to the Study of Human Evolution By FREDERICK TILNEY, mp. Professor of Neurology, Columbia University, N.Y. The Anatomical Record says: “One of the most interesting as well as one of the most important books published in many years.” Joseph Collins (N. Y. Times) says: “Dr. Tilney ... has made a contribution to anthropology which entitles him to be ranked as one of the outstanding men of science of his generation.” Robert M. Yerkes (Saturday Review of Literature) says: “A book with a purpose. Unlike most accounts of the brain it is not an inclusive atlas or a catalogue of functions, but instead a determ- ined attempt to discover and exhibit the developmental history of the human brain and to tell a significant part of the story of its evolution. Morris Fishbein (N. Y. Evening World) says: “This work by Tilney is a masterful production.” H. L. Mencken(American Mercury) says: “A monograph of the first importance. It is crowded with facts that have been hitherto unknown or inaccessible, and they are presented in a very orderly and convenient manner, with accurate measurements and plenty of diagrams and photographs. The two volumes are beauti- fully printed.” The Homiletic Review speaks of “this outstanding and educationally priceless work.” John Ruhrah(Baltimore Sun) says: “The remarkable part of this work is that, while it presents a large mass of technical details of interest only to those who are already more or less familiar with the nature of the brain, it at the same time con- tains a fascinating story of man’s origin and of his brain development told in such a way as to be intelligible to any educated layman This is in itself a tour d’ esprit which anyone can appreciate, but only one familiar with the technique of the laboratory can form any adequate conception of the hours upon hours of painstaking labor which made this presentation possible.” The Lancet (London) says: “In two superbly printed and illustrated volumes Prof. Tilney has made a contribution to the study of the evolutionary aspects of the central nervous system on a scale never previously attempted.” Wm. K. Gregory (Natural History) says: “A work of the highest importance and interest.” TWO LARGE VOLUMES 8 x 1034 INCHES, CONTAINING OVER 1100 PAGES AND 517 ILLUSTRATIONS, MANY IN COLOR. HANDSOMELY BOUND IN CLOTH & NEATLY BOXED $25.00 net PAUL B- HOEBER ®¢ PWBLISHERS 76 FIFTH AVENUE y NEW YORK Publishers of Annals of Medical History; The American Journal of Surgery; The American Journal of Roentgenology and Radium Therapy; Annals of Roentgenology, etc. Stazione Zoologica, Naples, Italy Recently Purchased a SPENCER PRECISION ROTARY MICROTOME No. 820 For the same reason that Hundreds of Universities Colleges, and Research Labor- atories the world over have bought them, viz: FOR BETTER SECTION OUTTING SPENCER ROTARY MICROTOME The only rotary microtome ever made with an incline-plane feed. The feed and up-and-down movements are entirely in- dependent. It completely overcomes the inaccuracies usually encountered by rotary microtomes. No, $20 Spencer Rotary Microtome equipped with one knife, handle and back for sharpening and with three Object. \diScs\” . 7s. cicccsasenete yee eee pencn ene aireds) +) sisenete 5240.00 Educational Discount 10% ANOTHER Fe ORT SPENCER UNIVERSAL BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE No. 55 equipped with MULTIPLE NOSE PIECE A new, original, patented objective changer which carries three pairs of low power objectives and revolves like an ordinary nosepiece. The objectives may be removed instantly and others substituted. The objectives on the nosepiece are dust proof and the worker can easily get to them to clean them. NEW — ORIGINAL — BETTER Catalog M-37 Features them. SPENCER LENS COMPANY MANUFACTURERS SPENCER Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, SPENCER Optical Measuring Instruments, SAS Dissecting Instruments, ete. cErS BUFFALO, N. Y. Branches: New York, Chicago, San Francisco, Boston, Washington Volume 1V. Number 4 FIRST RUSSIAN FILM OF SEASON IS SUCCESSFUL On Thursday, July 18, the first of the series of motion pictures pre- sented by THE CoLtecTING Net for the benefit of its scholarship fund was shown in the auditorium of the laboratory. The picture was “Ten Days That Shook the World”, pro- duced by Sovkino and depicting the Soviet revolution that overthrew Kerensky’s Provisional Government in 1917.. This picture was pre- ceeded by a newsreel and followed by an amusing cake and _ poster auction with Dr. H. C. Bradley wielding the gavel. The feature cinema was amazing for its novel effects and rapid move- ment; especially its striking close- ups of peasant and soldier faces and the remarkable scene of the stalwart sailor repulsing the mayor of the city and his party as they attempt to cross the foot-bridge leading to the Winter Palace. The mob and battle scenes were general- ly agreed to be rather unusual and good in their presentation, and the symbolism by statues was called over emphasized, but without doubt the picture showed skill and origin- ality. The auditorium was practically filled, and all the better reserved seats were sold without difficulty. It was estimated that over $265.00 was taken in. The expenses of the performance were comparatively small. The profit has been turned into the CoLttectinG Net scholar- ship fund. (Continued on Page 6) CURRENTS IN THE HOLE At the following hours (Daylight Saving Time) the current in the hole turns to run from Buzzards Bay to Vineyard Sound: Date A.M. P.M. ily 27... 8:52 OF July 28.. 9-40; 10:10 inte AD a ee 10:32 HOS July 30.. E27 Jitiky Gil nae 12:07 12:20 Aug. 1: 1:08 22 PNT OAs ty ton) oi Ot 2:16 INES, (Gs. an cos se BO) Salt, In each case the current changes six hours later and runs from the Sound to the Bay. It must be re- membered that the schedule print- ed above is dependent upon the wind. Prolonged winds sometimes cause the turning of the current to occur a half an hour earlier or later than the times given above, ES EE WOODS HOLE, MASS., SATURDAY, JULY 27, 1929 M. B. L. Calentar Tuesday, July 30, 8:00 P. M. Seminar, Reuben Blum- “Some Effects of Cyani- Relation to Mitosis in Eggs.” Evening enthal, des in Arbacia Dr. Henry J. Fry, ‘‘A Critique of the Unusual Concepts Concern- ing the Mitotic Mechanism of the Echinoderm Egg.” Dr. Boris Sokoloff. of Malignant Metabolism.” “Liquefaction Tumor and Iron Friday, August 2, 8:00 P, M. Evening Lecture. Dr. P. B. Reh- berg, University of Copenhagen. “Studies of Kidney Function.” Saturday, August 2, 9:00 P. M. Club Dance. M. B. L. Club. Sunday, August 4, 8:30 P. M. xroup Singing. Cayadetta Dock. The PROGRAM We have the privilege of printing below an official statement concern- ing the activities of the Physiologi- cal Congress. It was received at our office on Thuzsday afternoon. The Congress will first convene on Monday evening, August 19. The opening meeting will be held in Sanders Theatre, Memorial Hall, Cambridge, and will be followed by a reception in the College Yard tendered by the Corporation of Harvard University. Tuesday morning and afternoon there will be regular business meet- ings of the Congress at the Harvard Medical School. For the ladies there will be an excursion to Con- cord. On Wednesday the business 'meetings will continue at the Har- vard Medical School. On Wednes- day evening the Dean and Faculty of the Medical School will invite the members of the Congress and their wives to a reception and a concert in the court of the Harvard Medical School. A. Fiedler and members of the Boston Symphony Orchestra will play. The business meetings of the Congress will be held on Thursday morning and afternoon. On Thurs- day evening a banquet will be ten- dered to the members of the Con- gress by the Federation of Ameri- can Societies of Experimental Biology in Memorial Hall. Business meetings will be held in the morning of August 23. The Congress will close formally on | Friday afternoon, August 23. Subscription $1.25 Single Copies, 20c Lecture Given on Structure of the Hyaline Amoebocytes La Structure des Dr. Fauré-Fremiet delivered title on July 19. Leo here. Harnly. Loeb, Amoebocytes Hyalins et Physiologiques. 3y Dr. F. Faure-FREMIET Professor of Comparative Embryology, College de France an A summary by the author together with a review by Dr. professor of pathology at Washington The summary has been translated from the French by Marie L. leurs Propriétés evening lecture bearing the above University, is printed }ot hyaline cells. International Congress of Physiology For those members of the Con- gress who remain in the vicinity of Boston there will be a clam bake at Woods Hole on Saturday. Further Information 3oston will be the scene of one ot the largest scientific meetings ever called together when the XI1Ith International Physiological Congress convenes on August 19. More than 1000 physiologists from all over the world are expected to attend this first meeting of the |Congress ever to be held outside Europe. The findings of these men during the three years since the last meeting will be made public in 600 or more papers to be read during the week from August 19 to 23. The Congress meets in the United States at the invitation of the American Physiological Socie- ty. The Federation of American Societies for Experimental Biology sharing with the American Physiological Society the honor of acting as hosts to the Congress. Professor William H. Howell of Johns Hopkins University has been chosen President of the Congress. The International which he is a member includes the following others, Filippo Bottazzi of Naples, Otto Frank of Munich, Eugene Gley of Paris, Archibald V. Hill of London, and Johan E. Johansson of Stockholm. Professor Walter B. Cannon of the Harvard Medical School is Chairman of the Congress Bureau in charge of ar- rangements. is (Continued on Page 5) Committee of | The hyaline amoebocytes present in all Invertebrates, present a great uniformity in structure and properties. The haemolymph of the starfish and the lymph of several Annelids |(Arenicola, Nephtys) are particularly favorable material for the study They approach in size the amoebocytes of Limulus jand of different Crustaceans and Molluses which can be closely com- pared to the hyaline amoebocytes themselves. These cells have a great phago- cytic activity; these are the “macro- phages” of Metschnikoff. They have the property of spreading on certain solid surfaces. and because of this property it has been sug- gested by Tait to name them thig- mocytes. Finally they can agglu- tinate and form the pseudo tissues which Dr. Leo Loeb has shown to be of interest in the analysis of the mechanism of histogenesis, in so far as they are related to the physico-chemical properties of the cells. The hyaline amoebocytes are mobile cells of the connective tissue cell type and are derived from the mesenchyme. They are closely comparable, in their physiological properties and structure, to certain mobile cells of the Vertebrates, such as the large connective tissue wandering cells of J. Renaut, gen- erally known under the name of histiocytes, or macrophages. Their close resemblance to the large blood monocytes has been demonstrated by the work of Carrel and Ebeling in vitro cultures. The histogenetic role of these cells has been studied by different workers during the phenomena of cicatrisation or of inflamatory re- actions (Kindred, Kedrowski, Zawarzin, etc.). What are the general morphological characteris- tics common to all the hyaline amoe- bocytes? The old figures represent them as round cells with fine straight pseudopodia. However, Patrick Geddes (1880) represents them differently in the Echinoderms from what Cattaneo (1891), Rosa (1896), Dekhuyzen (1901) repre- (Continued on Page 2) PAGE TWO THE |COLERCTING NET Loeb Reviews Lecture on the Structure of Hyaline Amoebocytes (Continued from Page 1) in the Molluscs and The like but are in nature of lamellae, and resemble petals or “wings”. As late as 1920 Edwin Goodrich gave an exact des- cription of them. Hyaline amoebo- cytes studied in vitro show large motile hyoloplasmic membra zs around a mass of granuloplasma; they are pleated, and often localized at one pole of the cells; the folds of this membrane show discontinuities which explain the old descriptions. A. Dehorne (1925) checks the cor- rectness of this structure and pro- poses the name of “chanoleucocy- tes” to characterize the hyaline amoebocytes. Carrel and (1926) observe around the macro- phage histiocyte and monocyte of the Veretbrates an identical forma- tion which they describe under the name “undulating membranes’. The characteristic structure of the “choanoleucocytes” can be observed in vitro ; but the hyaline amoebocytes do not necessarily possess this structure im vivo when they are in the lymph or the coelomic fluid of the living animal under normal conditions. sent them Annelids. not thread Numerous investigations on the agglutination of the amoebocytes have shown that the extraction of pseudopodia are, the | Ebeling | the lymph from the organism pro-| vokes a change in the amoebocytes’ properties and that this change is not, as previously thought, a fatal alt eration. Dekhuyzen (1910) shows that in different Invertre- brates the amoebocytes are fusi- form cells in vivo and that thej “petal-like’’ pseudopodia very rapidly in vitro. appear The amoebocytes of Arenicola are typical in vivo: they are elongated, rigid, elastic, fusiform cells; one observes a central nucleus, mitoc- hondria, and filaments capable of coloration which constitute “linome”. In vitro, the cell becomes fluid, and rounded, the linome dis- appears, the peripheral hyaloplasma develops i which grow _ rapidly hyaline lamellae, the choanoleucocytes. formation is still more curious in Nephtys. The introduction of foreign bodies or of bacteria in the living animal immediately provokes this transformation, and phagocy- tosis is only possible for cells in the form of “choanoleucocytes” Therefore, there are two possible cellular states, a quiescent one in which the cell is rigid and presents a complex structure, and an active state, in which the cell is semi-fluid and developes hyaline lamellae. This transformation is not final but reversible since little by little, under certain conditions at least, the choanoleucocytes of Arenicola for instance return to the initial fusiform structure. This is parti- cularly and form characteristic of The trans- the; spike-like projections | y which constitute the curiously organized pseudo tissues, in the sense given to this word by Dr. Leo Loeb. One must therefore accept this rough diagram : Quiescent state Active state But the speed of transformation is different in one direction or the other; it always takes one to two minutes for the cell to go from the quiescent to the active state and from 4 to 8 hours in the opposite direction. One ignores intimate changes of the protoplasmic struc- ture which accompany these trans- formations, but the idea comes to one’s mind of comparing them with the phenomena of thyxotropy des- eed by Freundlich, that is to say, with the reversible changes shown by certain gels. In both cases the mechanical upset seems to be the cause of a very rapid liquefaction. The study of the amoebocytes in the active state is particularly in- teresting in regard to the cellular physiology and to the phenomena of phagocytosis. Agglutination is one of the most typical manifestations of activity in the choanoleucocytes; Mme. Francgois L. Frank has filmed this phenomenon, and this film allows one to watch the rapidity which those cells adhere to one an- other and how the first flakes thus formed concentrate and contract. The active amoebocytes in lymph or sea water always have a super- ficial negative charge. But one can vary the sign and the value of this charge by changing the ionic com- position of the media, by introduc- ing for instance, an excess of mono- valent chlorides (Na, K, Li), bi- valent (Mg, Ca) or trivalent (La) and in varying the pH of the solution. The relative value and sign of the charge being estimated by the speed and the direction of displace- ment of the cells in an electric field (catophoresis), it has been noticed by Dr. J. Nichita that the agglu- tindtion is not modified by the variations of sign or by the inten- sity of the charge even if it is reduced to 0, providing the pH of the solution is compatible with the normal formation of hyoplasmic lamellae. The power of phagocytosis of the amoebocytes, like agglutination, is conditioned by special properties 'of hyaloplasmic lamellae: that is to say, the power to adhere to certain surfaces; or to be more exact the power to spread on certain inter- faces, such as liquid-solid, liquid- gas as if they ‘“‘moistened” the sur- face under consideration. The spreading out of the hyalo- plasma is easily studied in vitro in the living cell using a special ap- paratus, the “opak illuminator” of metallography, specially adapted for histological examinations by | Dr. Vonwiller. By means of this instru- clear in the agglutinates|ment the cell is illumined by “auto with collination”’ and the light which comes to the observer's eye has been retlected by the protoplasmic sur- faces. If a hyaloplasma lamella is sufficiently thin, and if its upper and lower surfaces are sufficiently near, the two rays reflected by these surfaces interfere and one obtains a colored image of the hyaline la- mella. When the observation by transparence or by the dark field illumination shows nothing, one can see a colored chart of the thickness of the hyaloplasmic film and follow their variations or their movements which allows measurements. In comparison to the order of their molecular size this thickness is con- siderable since it varies between 0.13 and 0.5. (Miss Choucroun) The spreading of the hyaloplasma on an interface is always limited by the internal forces of cohesion when the physiological conditions become normal. The calculation shows that when a hyaline amoebocyte passes to the active state, its surface can increase (by the development of the hyaline lamellae) in the proportion of 1 to 7. This surface increase by pro- trusion of the hyaline lamellae can be effected in liquid media without contact with a surface which can be moistened; the hyaloplasma has therefore a negative superficial ten- sion. And this suggests a parallel- ism between the “smectic” “nematic” states which characterize certain liquid crystals or the “mye- linic figures’ which the lecithin give in contact with the aqueous media. In certain conditions birefrin- gence is produced by the dehydra- tion of the amoebocyte agglutinates ; the fact that the hyaline lamellae adhere, or better still “wet” unequal- ly different interfaces (oil, glass, mica, gelatine); and the fact that they have a superficial negative ten- sion,permits the hypotnesis that the large heteropolar molecules are oriented perpendicularly to their surface without formation of par- allel planes, since the examination with the spectrograph X made in de Broglie’s laboratory with Trillat, is negative on this point. The physical structure of the protoplasmic surfaces is import- ant in regard to the cellular physi- ology in general and to the study of phagocytosis of opsonisation in particular. What do we know about the chemical composition of the hyaline lamellae? It is easy to study the composi- tion of amoebocytes of the starfish. An, Asterias rubens of medium size (100 gr.) gives 23cc of hydro- lymph; one litre of hydrolymph contains 45 gr. of amoebocytes which one can easily gather in the active state after agglutination; one needs about 880 starfish of me- dium size to obtain one hundred grams of amoebocytes. These contain about 80% water; the re- maining 20% contains the remain- and the; ing substances :—6.2% lecithin and diverse lipoids (glycerids, choles- terol, etc.). The mass of one medium sized amoebocyte (determined by differ- ent methods) is from 32 x 10% The corresponding minimum sur- face is 220u? and the maximum surface is 1570p?. The amoebocy- tes contained in ! liter of hydrol lymph can develop a total surface of 21.41 square metres and contain 0.06 grams of lecithin, a quantity which, after Adam’s measure- ments, could cover in monomolecu- lar layer, a surface of 50 square meters. Besides, the chemical histologi- cal properties of the hyaline lamel- lae permit the conclusion that the lipoid and more especially the phosphoamino lipoids enter in their constitution. But the index of re- fraction of the hyaline lamellae is always inferior to that of the cellu- lar cytoplasm (respectively 1.446 and 1.385 in Asteria; 1.400 and 1.364 in Lumbricus). It is prob- able that the change from the quiescent to the active state is ac- companied by a change in the dis- tribution of the cellular cytoplas- mic constituents, and by an absorp- tion of water by the hyaloplasma. The hyaloplasmic lamellae are ani- mated by very slow movements which the photographic films made by Mme Frangois L. Frank permit one to study. They appear, disap- pear, they develop; and their phy- sico-chemical properties give to these choanoleucocytes an import- ant physiological and histogenetic role. REVIEW By Dr. Leo Logg Professor of Pathology, Washington University Medical School Dr. Fauré-Fremiet clear and interesting presentation illustrated by beautiful cinemato- graphs of his investigations into the structure and physiology of the hyaline or “‘choano” amoebocytes found in different classes of in- vertebrates, such as echinoderms, worms, and molluscs. He thus add- ed to the previous studies of the granular amoebocytes of Limulus and of certain other arthropods, the study of a type of cell which is similar in some essential respects to that found in Limulus, yet. suf- ficently different from it, to make a comparison of these two kinds of cells of great interest. It is true, that a considerable number of in- vestigators had previously observed and described the structure of vari- ous types of hyaline amoebocytes as they had also observed on the slide the clumping together of these cells into small masses of agglutinated cells which adhered to the surface of the slide. But it is only through the recent studies of Dr. Fauré- Fremiet that a deeper and more (Continued on Page 3) Save a Veny THE COLLECTING NET PAGE THREE Loeb Reviews Lecture on the Structure of Hyaline Amoebocytes (Continued from Page 2) thorough experimental analysis of the behavior of these hyaline types of cells under various experimental conditions, and with the aid of a refined microscopic technique, has been undertaken. The significance of investigations concerning the amoeboeytes of Limulus as well as the hyaline type of amoebocytes lies in their bearing on some fun- damental biological problems main- ly those concerning the mechanism of amoeboid movement of Phagocy- tosis, of agglutination of cells and tissue formation and of thrombosis ; they also contribute to the analysis of some of the factors underlying the behavior of cells in tissue cul- ture. In regard to amoeboid movements we are now in a position to compare with the movements known in various types of amoebae not only the movements of the amiwoebocytes of Limulus, but also those of “choano” amoebocytes. The witer can here merely point out a few of the similiarities and differences in the behavior of these two types of amoebocytes. As far as amoeboid movement is concerned, my studies led me to the conclusion in 1902 that amoeboid movement in the amoebocytes of Limulus depends upon a rhythmic change in the col- loidal state of the ectoplasmic layer of the cells, which first becomes more liquid and thus flows out and then gradually solidifief again. This solidification is soon followed by a renewed localized softening in the pseudopod or near its place of insertion or occasionally at a further distance from it in the peri- phery of the cell. While I con- sidered the possible significance of lipoids in these cell activities—and especially the interesting recent studies of Leathes on the effect of various salts on myelin figures sug- gested a possible connection of this kind, I thought, and I still believe it more probable, that proteins, per- haps in combination with certain lipoids, are mainly concerned in these phenomena. Dr. Fauré-Fre- miet is apparently inclined to attri- bute a great significance to the lipoids and he is able in this con- nection to point to the very inter- esting fact observed by him, that the traces of adherence on the slides left by moving choano amoe- hocytes are soluble in lipoid sol- vents. Of interest in this connec- tion is furthermore his quantitative analysis of the lipoid content of these cells. The amoeboid movement of the of amoeboid movement of phagocy- tosis, of agglutination of cells and in three respects. (1.) While also in the former the amoeboid move- ment is initiated by changes in the ectoplasmic layer, the granuloplasm under ordinary conditions partici- pates*in the movement and, as far as I-can see, here also rhythmic changes take place—although quan- titatively less pronounced ones than in the ectoplasm. But it may here again be stated that in general there seems to be a continuity between the ectoplasmic and intergranular hyalo- plasm and that these two cell constituents seem to differ mainly (but perhaps not exclusively) in the consistency of the material com- posing them (2) The amoebocytes of Limulus apparently represent a much more plastic material than the choano amoebocytes and also than amoebae. In the amoebocytes of Limulus we can, through modifica- tion of the physical and chemical environment, readily obtain a great variety of different types of amoe- boid movement, according to the changes in the consistency of the cell which we can produce experi- mentally without great difficulty. (3.) It seems that the amoebocyte of Limulus is much more dependent on a protein medium for its pre- servation and normal function than the two other types of cells, (amoe- bae and hyaline or choano amoe- bocytes) ; this is apparently related to the ditferences in the normal environment in the life of the amoebocytes of Limulus on the on hand, and of the two other kinds of cells on the other hand. The greater resistance to seawater which Dr. Fauré-Fremiet found in the case of the choano amoebocytes and the greater resis- tance to seawater (or fresh water) which exists in the case of amoebae as compared to the destructive ef- fect which seawater has on the amoebocyte of Limulus, presumably also depends on the difference in the constitution of the normal media in which these varieties of organisms live. There are on the other hand also some interesting similarities be- tween the reactions of choano amoe- bocytes and of the amoebocytes of Limulus. In both cases the cells within the body are resting and rigid as far as their ectoplasmic layer is concerned and it is only under the influence of the altera- tions in environment and especially under the influence of agencies act- ing mechanically, that the surface layer becomes sticky and that all those remarkable changes take place that one can see in the amoebocytes under experimental conditions. However, also outside the body we do not have to deal, at least in the case of Limulus, with a constant fluidity of the protoplasm as com- pared with the rigidity of the amoebocytes within the normal lymph blood channels, but as men- tioned above, the active state of these cells is characterized by series of rhythmic changes varying be- tween more or less rigid and fluid conditions especially of the ectoplasm but to some extent also of the granuloplasm. In this con- nection the observations of Dr. Fauré-Fremiet according to which certain fibrillar structures may dis- appear in the amoebocytes of Areni- cola during the state of activity, and’ later reappear when the cells are agglutinated and regain a rigid state, are of great interest. While the character of the amoeboid move-| ment differs, as is stated above, in| some essential respects in these two types of amoebocytes, certain simi- larities exist between what I called | the “tongue” pseudopods and the petaloid pseudopods of the choano amoebocytes. In the case of the amoebocytes of Limulus, [ have! not been able to obtain a complete | reversal from the active to the rigid state and elliptic shape of these cells seen within the body. On the other hand I could produce the active state of amoebocytes within the body by introducing foreign bodies into the blood lymph channels: around these foreign bodies the amoebocytes agglutinate and thus form a mass of cells which phylo- genetically represents the beginning of the agglutination thrombi which are so important in the pathogenesis of intravascular abnormalities in the human organism. As to the action of various salts or ions on amoebocytes, some dif- ferences exist, between the effects on the blood cells of Limulus as studied by the writer and on the hyaline cells as studied by Dr. Fauré-Fremiet; but some essential similarities exist also, and I was especially impressed by the similar- ity in the action of Ca and both kinds of amoebocytes as contrasted with the different action of this substance on amoebae. The spreading out movements of cells in contact with more or less solid surfaces which I designated as tissue-stereotropism (1898) and presumably also the related process of agglutination of amoebocytes with one another seem to be taken by Dr. Fauré-Fremiet, in agree- ment with the conception especial- ly of Tait, as surface tension pheno- mena comparable to those concerned in the spreading out of a drop of water on the clean surface of a glass slide. I believe that in addi- tion to pure surface tension changes, of a further going—pre- sumably physico-chemical — kind enter into these phenomena, as far as my observations with amoebocyte tissues of Limulus seem to indicate. In every case the stimulus appears to lead to the development of usual- ly localized areas of softening. This change in consistency represents the primary alteration. In regard to the process of ex- tension, Dr. Fauré-Fremiet notes that it can take place in a fluid medium and is therefore not re- stricted to the contact with a solid surface or with an interface. Also in the amoebocytes of Limulus one can observe an extension of pseu- dopods into the fluid and even in an upward direction; however I do not remember ever having observed an actual spreading out or locomotion of the Limulus blood cells without contact with a solid surface or at least with an air-fluid interface, and Ihave expressed formerly the belief that the surface changes and especi- ally the stickiness associated with the spreading out processes in the amoebocytes of Limulus may ex- plain the factors underlying tissue stereotropism. Dr. Fauré-Fremiet believes that the formation of petaloid pseudopods must precede agglutination and that it is the latter which really agglutinate. In the case of the amoebocytes of Limulus, the formation of pseudo- pods is not necessary for the agglu- tination of these cells. All that is required is a change in the physico- chemical state of the surface layer including the surface layer of the granuloplasm which leads to such a change in consistency as is favorable for agglutination. In the case of Limulus, mechanical factors seem to be principally responsible for the initiation of those reaction chains which ultimately lead to agglutination of the amoebocytes. As to tissue or “pseudo” tissue (experimental tissue) formation which under certain conditions fol- lows the agglutination, I gained the impression from Dr. Fauré- Fremiet’s observations that the re- sults obtained in this respect with amoebocytes of Limulus cannot be fully imitated with the choano amoe- bocytes which have been so far in- vestigated by him. At present it is only with the former kind of cells that the first origin and some of the primary phenomena of woundheal- ing, of cell movements and of tissue like transformations, resembling in certain respects, those seen in cul- tures of more differentiated tissues can be studied in vitro and that the origin of tissue formation and its connection with thrombosis can be analysed to advantage. When I was asked to comment on Dr. Fauré-Fremiet’s lecture I be- lieved that a comparison between the behavior of the choano (or hyaline) amoebocytes studied by him and of the amoebocytes of Limulus, might be of some interest. It is with the latter alone that I am familiar through my own investiga- tions. In view of Dr. Heilbrunn’s letter to the Collecting Net, in regard to reviews of scientific papers, it is |with some trepidation that I see this review appear because I have no severe criticism to make of Dr. Fauré-Fremiet’s contributions; on the contrary I believe that he has added a new field—that of the hy- aline amoebocytes—to the study cell activities and I can only express my admiration for the technical re- finements introduced by him in the study of these phenomena ; especial- ly the use of Vonwiler’s “Opak- Illuminator” gives pictures of de- tails in amoebocytes which surpass, as far as clarity is concerned, those revealed by any other method, and allow the approximate determina- tion of changes in the thickness of the hyaline lamellae of the choano amoebocytes. PAGE FOUR Viscosity of THE COLLECTING NET Protoplasm Altered by Changes in pH THE EFFECTS OF ACIDS AND ALKALIES ON THE VISCOSITY OF ARBA Bie len University Barth delivered a paper } summary Mr. seminar on July 16. A by Dr. George H. A, Clowes, research director of Ely Lilly and Company, is printed here. CIA EGG PROTOPLASM x. BARTH, of Chicago yearing the above title at the evening by the author together with a review These investigations were under- taken to determine the effect of the hydrogen ion on the viscosity of protoplasm. The unfertilized eggs of Arbacia were used and the viscosity was determined by the centrifuge method. The rate of movement of the pigment granules of the egg through the protoplasm | gives us a measure of the viscosity. The velocity of the granules is in- versely proportional to the viscosity, or if we use a constant distance through which the granules must move, the time of centrifuging is| directly proportional to the viscos- ity. “The pH was regulated with various acids and bases in sea water and in isosmotic sodium chloride. It should perhaps be emphasized that only the external pH was de- termined and that the internal pH does not pH of the environment. The eggs were exposed to the solutions for fifteen minutes after which some were returned to sea water and fer- tilized and some were used to de- termine their viscosity. When the eggs are treated with acids in isosmotic sodium chloride the protoplasm becomes coagulated at a pH of 5.0-5.2, regardless of the nature of the acid. the literature on the effects of acids oe cell division, on toxicity, and from the results on the penetration of acids, we should expect to find a greater effect with weak acids as compared with the strong acids. However, if the same acids be dissolved in sea water we find that the nature of the acid is important. | Weak acids such as carbonic and butyric coagulate at pH’s above 5.0, while hydrochloric and sul- phuric do not coagulate until 2.8- 3.0. The action of the sodium chloride may be either’on the sur-| face of the cell causing changes in| the cell membrane which allow the strong acids to penetrate more or less freely, or it may have an in- terior effect causing coagulation. | Sodium chloride does not cause coagulation when traces of calcium| ion are present as was the case in all of these experiments. Centri- fuging shows that the viscosity -of| eggs in sodium chloride is the same | On the other hand | as in sea water. sodium chloride has a solvent action on the surface of cells agglutination in Arbacia and solu- tion of cilia in Arenicola. The coagulation is not due to the always correspond to the| These | results are surprising, since from| lal causing formation of visible granules in the protoplasm. For, if the eggs be centrifuged vigorously, producing stratification of the contents of the egg, and acid is then added, there appear to be no granules fornied in the hyaline zone. Yet the vis- cosity of substances in the hyaline zone has so increased that the granules no longer move under the influence of centrifugal force. The coagulation therefore appears to be a gelation of the ground substance of the egg. When the viscosity of Arbacia | protoplasm is determined at various pH’s several interesting facts are brought to light. In the first place, if we compare the action of hydro- chloric acid when used in sea water and when dissolved in isosmotic sodium chloride, we find that al- HCl in sea water from 8.2 to 3.5, jin sodium chloride the acid in- creases viscosity at high pH’s. Thus at 6.0 there is a distinct increase in viscosity. If we compare the action of HC] in sodium chloride with an acid which is known to penetrate cell membranes such as carbonic acid, we find that the pH-viscosity curves are almost identical. The action of carbon dioxide depends largely on its concentration and not necessarily on the pH. Thus bub- bling carbon dioxide through sea water is more effective at the same pH than generating carbon dioxide by the addition of acid to sea water, due to the greater concentration in |the former. Time is a factor in the action of acids on viscosity. Thus if eggs are exposed to a pH of 4.1 using HCl which does not coagulate in 15 minutes, after one hour the pri- toplasm has coagulated. The effects of acids are to some extent rever- |sible up to the point of coagulation jas tested by returning the eggs to sea water and fertilizing. For the action of alkalies sodium and ammonium hydroxides were chiefly used. NaOH in sea water has no visible effect on viscosity up to a pH of 10.2. In ammonium hy- droxide the viscosity falls at 8.5 reaching a low value at 9.6, after which it rises suddenly with com- plete coagulation at 10.0. If NaOH be used in isosmotic sodium chlo- ride then a similar decrease in vis- cosity is obtained without, however, the coagulation. The most plau- sible explanation of the action of NaCl is that it increases the per- (Continued on Page 5) though there is no visible effect of |: PUBLISHED BY HOEBER » FOR THE BIOLOGIST » M cClung’s HANDBOOK OF Microscopical Technique For Workers in Both Animal and Plant Tissues By Wm. H. F. Apptson, Ezra ALLEN, Jos. L. APPLETON, JR., ROBERT CHAMBERS, Wittram V. Cons, Harotp J. Conn, Epmunp V. Cowpry, Utric DAHLGREN, Hat Downey, SopHia H. Eckerson, N. CHANDLER Foote, ROBERT T. Hance, CuesTer H. Heuser, RAPHAEL Isaacs, FRANK B. MALLORY, CLARENCE E. McCLune, JosepHINE W. McNass, FREDERICK PARKER, JR., WILDER PENFIELD, FLORENCE R. Sasin, P. G. SHipcey, ErHet M. Super, WM. RANDOLPH Taylor, D. H. WENRICH. Epitep sy C. E. McCLUNG, PuD. Professor of Zoology, and Director of Zoological Laboratory, University of Pennsylvania LARGE 8VO, WATERPROOF STURDITE, ILLUSTRATED - $8.00 net Eugenical News says: “The book is attractively printed and it is bound with conditions of the laboratory work-table in mind. 17 wiLL DOUBTLESS BE RECOGNIZED FOR YEARS TO COME AS A STANDARD BOOK ON THE SUBJECT.” The Journal of the American Medical Association says: “THE BOOK IS UP TO DATE AND IS TO BE RECOMMENDED AS A HAND- BOOK WHICH STUDENTS OF TECHNIQUE WILL FIND VALUABLE.” American Journal of Public Health says: “Tt should be in the library of every public health laboratory and laboratory technician. . . . It shows evidence of careful editing and the effort to include minor practical details of manipulation on which the succes-ful preparation of excellent microscopical preparations so often depends. IT Is QUITE UP TO DATE IN THE INCLUSION OF RECENTLY DEVEL’ OPED FIELDS AND SPECIAL METHODS.” Anatomical Record says: “Whether one be a beginner seeking general information or a spe- cialist comparing particular processes, his needs are taken care of in one volume not too large to be conveniently handled.” Cowdry’s Special Cytology The Form & Functions of the Cell in Health & Disease A TEXTBOOK FOR STUDENTS OF Biotocy & MepICcINE By Lestie B. Arey, Percivat Bartey, R. R. Benstey, C. H. Buntinc, ALExIs CarreL, A. E. Conn, G. W. Corner, E. V. Cowpry, Hat Downey, G. Cart Huser, J. AtBrrt Key, E.B. KRuMBHAAR, ALBERT Kuntz, LEo Logs, C. C. MACKLIN, M. T. Macktin, E. F. Martone, FRANK C. Mann, Davip Marine, A. A. Maximow, Epwarp B. Meics, C. W. Metz, W. S. Miter, EuGene L. Opre, WILDER PENFILD, A. T. Rasmussen, J. PARSONS SCHAEFFER, G. E. SHAMBAUGH, P. G. SHIPLEY, G. N. Srewart, CHARLES R. Stocxarp, D. L. STORMONT, FREDERICK TILNEY, T. Wincate Topp, G. B. WIsLocKI. A Epirep By EDMUND V. COWDRY Professor of Cytology, Washington University, St. Louis 2 VOLS., LARGE 8vO, WATERPROOF STURDITE, 1376 PP..693 ILLUS. $20.00 net The Eugenical News says: “A BOOK EVERY BIOLOGIST WILL WANT TO OWN... . The latest lit- erature is here copiously referred to.... The greatest American con- tribution to the encyclopedias of histology.” {There has not beena single adverse criticism of this work, the worst that any one has found to say about it is that: ‘‘the contributions are not all of equal value!’’} Our 112 page Catratocue and Circulars will be sent on request. PAUL B» HOEBER ®© PUBLISHERS 76 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK Publishers of Annals of Medical History; The American Journal of Surgery; The American Journal of Roentgenology and Radium Therapy; Annals of Roentgenology, etc. BARTH SUMMARY (Continued from Page 4) meability of the cell membrane to acids and alkalies, since it is not probable that with acids it coagula- tes while with alkalies it lowers viscosity. It is interesting to note by ex- amination of the viscosity curves that a slight variation in the pH about 6.5 produces a change in vis- cosity. This is significant since the best measurements of protoplasmic pH indicate that it is about 6.8. The normal changes in viscosity of the cell may be a function of the inter- nal hydrogen ion concentration. REVIEW By Dr. Grorce H. A. CLoweEs Research Director of Eli Lilly and Company, Indianapolis The experiments of Mr. Barth are extremely interesting and harmonize in certain respects with the observa- tions of Homer Smith and Clowes who found that when CO? free sea- water was rendered acid by means of hydrochloric or alkaline by means of caustic soda, a 10 minute exposure of unfertilized Arbacia eggs caused 100% destruction at pH 4.2, but permitted of practically 100% survival at pH 4.6 to 4.8. A 30 minute treatment showed com- plete destruction at pH 4.3 to 4.4, and complete survival at pH 4.8 to 5.0. In these experiments the high- est percentage of survival after prolonged exposure was found to be in the range of pH 6-0 to 6.2. In the case of Asterias the correspond- ing critical levels were shifted somewhat toward the alkaline side. As a general rule the range within which unfertilized eggs were found to survive and fertilized eggs were found capable of development was found to be approximately from pH 5.0 to 10.0, which harmonizes with Mr. Barth’s observation that even if the protoplasm of the eggs was not coagulated after 15 minu- tes exposure to a pH of 4.1 using the protoplasm was found to be coagulated indicating that an irre- versible and destructive coagulation process had been initiated which even though it was not recognizable at the time that the eggs were re- moved from the acid, was neverthe- less sufficiently advanced to pro- ceed to completion of coagulation, a phenomenon with which workers on blood coagulation are very familiar. The actual process of fertiliza- tion was found to take place only within the comparatively narrow pH range of 6.7 to 10.0, but in the range from pH 4.6 or 5.0 to pH 6.7 or 7.0, the block to fertilization was found to be in great measure rever- sible, which harmonizes with Mr. Barth’s observation that no irrever- sible coagulation occurs within that range. As regards the effect of carbon dioxide, Smith and Clowes found that an increase in the carbon dio- xide tension reduced, and a de- THE COLLECTING NET nee crease in carbon dioxide tension in- creased the velocity of cell divi- sion at a given pH, and that with increasing alkalinity an increasng CO* tension was required to main- tain a constant rate of division. This was believed to be attributable to the lipo-solubility of CO? and _ its capacity to readily penetrate protoplasm and cause a mod- ification in the pH range of interior aqurous phases. It should however be borne in mind that these CO? effects are in great mea- sure reversible and there is no reason to believe that CO? within the ranges in which it was employed caused any coagulation effect. PHYSIOLOGICAL CONGRESS (Continued from Page 1) More than 500 members of the Congress are expected from abroad. The exact number is not yet deter- mined, but it will include most of the eminent physiologists of the world. Thirty-five countries will be respesented. Some of these members will arrive several weeks in advance of the date for the meet- ing, but the bulk of them are ex- pected to arrive during the week immediately preceding the first meeting, and of these the greatest number will come direct to Boston on the S- S. Minnekahda on Sun- day, August 27. Since this first gathering, the Congress has met in many old world capitals. In 1892 the second meeting was held in Liege, and Leon Fredericq, President of the Congress in that year, will be pre- sent at the assembly in Boston. The Congresses of the past have afforded physiologists from all over the world a chance to exchange their ideas, as those ideas have grown and developed during the ; three years which have intervened since the last meeting. Many of the titles listed in the program of the Congress present apparatus and demonstrations of the mechanics of experiments. Of the contributions 3 ‘ ‘to physiology from year to year, hydrochloric acid, after one hour | Wee sy Ue y many come through affiliated sci- ences which shed new light on old theories. And those students of biology whose societies are inter- ested in physiology take part in the Congress as associate members. Membership in the Congress is limited to properly accredited per- sons from foreign countries and to members of the Federation of American Societies for Experimen- tal Biology. Because of the large attendance at recent Congresses it has been found necessary to limit each member to the presentation of not more than one paper. The pro- gram of the Congress will contain the abstracts of all these papers, more than 600 in all. French, Ger- man, Italian and English wil be the official languages of the Congress. During the week of the Congress members from abroad and _ their families will be lodged in the dormitories of Harvard University as the guests of the Federation of American Societies for Experi- mental Biology. 40 Colleges Used It the Past School Year Introduction Vertebrate Embryology By WALDO SHUMWAY, Ph. D. Universiry of Illinois. The distinctive feature of this text is the use of two methods of presentation. The comparative method, now used quite generally by the foremost European embryologists ana more recently by American zoologists, is employed in lectures and reading, while the sequential method is utilized in labora- tory work. This combination has produced a text that is both practical and teachable. Four forms are emphasized; Amphioxus, the frog, the chick and man. In Section I, embryonic membranes and the development of body form are emphasized. The next division deals with the separate organs and organ systems. Part III, which covers the atlas, treats of the anatomy of the frog, the chick and the pig. A study of laboratory technique concludes the volume. An excellent, additional feature is the inclusion of a series of original and redrawn figures prepared by the scientific artist, Mrs. Katherine Hill Paul. “The method of presentation is not only new, but strikingly clear and attractive. There are many features which appeal to the teacher because of the effective way in which they have been presented. This book is specially to be commended because of the richness of the illustrations and of the fact that so many standbys have been replaced by figures that are representative of the present-day progress in this field of investigation. The figures are not only very well selected but they are exceptionally well drawn and reprinted.” 6 by 9. Cloth $3.75 John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 440 Fourth Avenue New York City 314 pages. 195 figures Laboratory Books for Biology Atwood & Heiss. Educational Biology. By William H. Atwood and Elwood D. Heiss, State Teachers College, Milwaukee. Edited by S. R. Powers, Columbia University. Cloth, $2.75. Gager. Laboratory Guide for General Botany. By C. Stuart Gager, Brooklyn Botanic Garden. Cloth, $1.25. Palladin, Livingston. Plant Physiology. 3d American Edition. By V. I. Palladin, University of Petrograd, The Edition in English by Burton E. Livingston, Johns Hopkins University. Cloth, $4.00. Kostychev. Plant Respiration. By Dr. S. Kostychev, University of Len- ingrad. Translated and Edited by Charles J. Lyon, Dartmouth College. Cloth, $2.50. Stevens. Plant Anatomy. 4th Edition. versity of Kansas. Cloth, $3.50. Galloway and Welch. Zoology. 4th Edition. By Thomas Walton Gal- loway; Co-reviser, Paul S. Welch, University of Michigan. Cloth, $2.75 Kingsley. Comparative Anatomy. 3rd Edition. By J. S. Kingsley, Uni- versity of Illinois. Cloth, $4.00. Kingsley. Vertebrate Skeleton. By J. S. Kingsley, University of Illinois. Cloth, $6.00 Folsom. Entomology with Special Reference to Its Economic Aspects. 3rd Edition. By Justus Watson Folsom, University of Illinois, Cloth, $4.00. Lochhead. Economic Entomology. versity. Cloth, $2.75. Pratt. Manual of Land and Fresh Water Vertebrate Animals of the United States. By Henry S. Pratt, Haverford College. Cloth, $6.00. Patten. The Evolution of the Vertebrates and Their Kin. By Wm. Patten, Dartmouth College. Cloth, $6.00. Wilder. A Laboratory Manual of Anthropometry. By Harris H. Wilder, Cloth, $3.00. Patten. The Embryology of the Pig. Reserve University. Cloth, $3.50. Patten. The Early Embryology of the Chick. M. Patten, Western Reserve University. Cloth, $2.50. McMurrich. Development of the Human Body. 7th Edition. By J. Playfair MeMurrich, University of Toronto. Cloth, $3.25. Bremer. Textbook of Histology. By J. L. Bremer, Harvard Medical School. Cloth, $6.00. Harman. Laboratory Outlines for Embryology. 2nd Edition. T. Harman, Kansas State Agricultural College. By William C. Stevens, Uni- By Wm. Lochhead, McGill Uni- By Bradley M. Patten, Western 3rd Edition. By Bradley By Mary Cloth, $1.00. P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO. Inc. 1012 WALNUT ST. PUBLISHERS PHILADELPHIA PAGE FIVE PAGE SIX THE COLLECTING NET The Collecting Net New Bedford Massachusetts Woods Hole Telephone: Falmouth 1225 A weekly publication concerned with the activities of the Marine Bio-| logical Laboratory and of Woods | Hole. STAFF Ware Cattell ............--- Editor Assistant Editors Annaleida S, Cattell Eugene DuBois Contributing Editors Kathryn Hulme Helen S. Morris Mary Coggeshall Alice A. Gooding Theodore Wyman Business Manager Ilse Michaelis Shirley H. Gray—Printer New Bedford, Massachusetts EDITORIAL We believe that our new plan of segregating the local news from the body.of THe CoLiectinG NET is a good one. Several reasons were responsible for bringing about this differentiation. In the first place it does not represent a_ radical change in policy. We have always printed local news—in 1926 we in- cluded a “Town Topics” column} which was edited by a local resident. Some of the reasons for the change are: (1) The number of outside sub- scribers to THE CoLLectiING NET is} becoming wider with the passing of time. Its circulation is not limited to this country. Over a dozen libra- ries are on its subscription list. The Library of Columbia University has just now purchased all of the back volumes. It is rather incon- gruous for a person to pick up a copy of THe Cottectinc Net and find a note to the effect that a local resident hurt his foot sandwiched between the technical and learned discussions of our scientists. The local news is arranged in a supple- ment so that it can be easily re- moved and discarded by those per- sons wishing to preserve only the material concerning the laboratory. (2) Members of the laboratory are interested in Woods Hole and in its residents. This applies especially to those workers who own property here. It is interesting for them to read the local news and important for them to know some- thing about the administration of the Town of Falmouth. In paying the property tax they turn money into the town treasury. They should have an interest in the disposition of this money. The local supple- ment will enable us to report local conditions and news effectively be- cause the permanent residents are contributing to its support. (3) Because the people in Woods Hole have no way of get- ting all the local news. Before our supplement came into being it was necessary for them to pay twenty cents for a copy of THe CoLLectiInG Ner. Without being encumbered with irrevelant material they can now obtain it for three cents. Sutroduring Dr. Henri FREDERICQ, who has come down to Woods Hole to carry on his research work at our labora- tory. He is now professor of gen- }eral physiology in the faculty of /medicine and the faculty of science as well as director of the physiolog- ical Department of the University of Liége. In 1920 and 1921 he held the position of professor of general physiology atthe University of Ghent. Dr. Fredericq is particularly interested in heart physiology and is the author of a book entitled “Physiologie Du Myocarde” which was published in 1927. The prob- lem that has recently been claiming most of his time is that of the phys- iology of excitability in general as measured by chronaximetric meth- ods. At this laboratory he is con- tinuing some of his work on the excitability of the heart of Limulus and other invertebrates which he be- gan last year at Roscoff. In 1927 Dr. Fredericq was an exchange professor for the C. R. B- Educational Foundation and_lec- tured in more than twenty uni- versities throughout the country, in- cluding California. Last year he was awarded an honorary degree by | the university of Cairo (Egypt). He holds the position of cor- responding member of the Royal Academy of Medicine of Belgium and of the Société de Biologie. Dr. Fredericq sailed from Bel- gium and arrived in New York in the middle of July. He will carry on his work at this laboratory until the first week in October when he returns to his native country. To the Editor: July 25, 1929 We have received no proof of the Serial list for at least a week. it is a matter of concern and a good deal of a surprise to me that the printing of this list is not being pushed hard- er. Will you let me know how the matter stands? Priscilla B- Montgomery. NOTE:—At announced on the edi- torial page of the last number the ex- tensive list of serial holdings of the M. B. L. Library will be printed as soon as possible. Every effort is being made to have the supplement appear in an early number. To The Editor: July 26, 1929 If the “Ten Days That Shook The World” had all been put into one cocktail shaker the size of the Mauretania, and if the cocktail had been poured into a very large vol- cano crater and the crater had had its fill, it would belch forth after the manner of Chinese courtesy, more in politeness than gratitude. What we wanted to say was—after all the world had been shaken, and “scepters and crowns had tumbled down and in the dust been equal made with the poor crooked scythe and spade”, we feel that the news reel preceding the cataclysmatic fil- lum. was rather an anachronism. How come, Brother Editor, the cheering multitudes as the contem- porary royalty went by? Wee Peck It. THE RUSSIAN MOVIE (Continued from Page 1) Piano accompaniment was fur- nished by Mrs. C. D. Snyder, who played the special musical score arranged for the picture. This com- prised various appropriate Russian and other themes, such as “The International Song” by Lipskin and the “Prelude in C minor” by Rachmaninoff. The ushers, who were girls from the M. B. L., were generously out- fitted with Russian costumes by Mrs. Sergius Morgulis, who recent- ly held an exhibition of several varieties of articles which she has imported from Moscow. The quaint and picturesque dresses gave a very delightful touch to the performance. In the intermission between the last two reels Dr. Bradley mounted the rostrum, assumed the gavel, and began to harangue the audience in the most fetching terms known to auctioneers. After he had finished a brief prelude, including a defini- tion of the “terms of sale’, the goods were marched up the aisle and on to the stage by a corps of ushers. Many cheers greeted the display. The first item put up was a cake, so small that it had to be vouched for and attested to in order to satisfy the people in the rear of the room that it really existed. However, brisk bidding soon ran it up to $2.00, at which price it went after many vain ham- merings and exhortations. A somewhat larger specimen of the culinary art was next laid on the block; it was proclaimed “small family size’’ as opposed to the “bachelor size’’ of the previous one. It proved very popular and was run up to spectacular price of “Ten dollars bid, twenty dollars asked! Who bids twenty dollars? Who bids twenty dollars? Cheap at thirty! Did I hear someone say twenty?” But it stopped at ten, which was a fair price enough for it. At this juncture the auctioneer required a rest, because his arm was tired from holding the two cakes he had just sold. The final cake was light and delicate, attri- butes which suddenly became assets instead of liabilities. It went at the losing figure of $5.00 cash. The posters which had been drawn. to advertise the motion pic- ture were now put up, and it was the opinion of many that even Sotheby’s of London never had a more thrilling art sale than the one that followed. Bombs, synagogues and Kremlins were disposed of in rapid order, and each brought about $2.00 in the scramble for the treasures. As a closing gesture Dr. Bradley announced that the baker of the cakes wished to remain anony- mous. The luckiest man of the evening was Dr. Cowdry, whose birthday it happened to be. He was seen escaping from the building after the show with his arms laden with cakes, and with his ears buzzing with congratulatory sentiments ex- pressed by his friends in person and by a chorus of ushers who sang a little chant in his honor. On Thursday next will be shown the second Russian picture of the season. It will be “Three Com- rades and One Invention’, an up- roarious comedy whose complica- tions may be partly guessed at from the title. Everyone who enjoyed “Ten Days That Shook the World” should see it. THE CHARGE OF THE BLIGHT BRIGADE There’s mold on the delphiniums, Chrepanthemums and phlox, White aphis at the asters roots Green aphis on the dahlia shoots, There’s hug and blight— To left and right— On ainnias and stocks! No matter how I dust and spray In every kind of modern way, With Paris green and nicotine And sulphur, lime and kerosene, The wretched crew That suck and chew Attack my flowers in flocks. Some say the rains brought this about, And others blame it on the drought. The weevil has attacked the beans, The beetles at the beets, The welts on the tomato vine, The corn has smut. All down the line Potato bugs And slimy slugs Pull gustatory feats! Although I make my crops rotate And in my spraying alternate From fungicide, insecticide, To dope, soft soap and germicide, The loathsome lot That blight and blot Are ruining my lots. Some say my land is sour or poor, And some, I’ve used too much manure ! The leaf spots on the cherry trees. The psyllas on the pear, ° San Jose scale is on the peach, And caterpillars out of reach, Do multiply, While mite and fly, And gnats prevade the air, Although the trees are trimmed, and fed With showers of arsenate of lead And every day in every way I try a different sort of spray The blighting pest— That knows no rest— Has left them sick and bare! Some say they’re in the borer’s clutch, And some, I’ve limed and sprayed too much! Contributed from the Department of Plant Pathology of the University of Wisconsin in 19238 to ‘‘The Biolo- gist,’ an organ of the Phi Sigma So- ciety. THE COLLECTING NET PAGE SEVEN The Farm As An Adjunct to Biological Research The Effingham B. Morris Bio- logical Farm of The Wistar Insti- tute of Anatomy and Biology offers to a limited number of investigators unique opportunities for experi- mental work on amblystoma and other fresh water forms. The Spring House Laboratory with its ample supply of cold (54°) water during the summer and cool operating rooms furnishes the ex- act conditions required for such work. The old colonial farm house, built partly of stone and partly of red and black bricks, with its many attractive features peculiar to the country, has been restored and fur- nished with comforts of a modern home, and is open for men pur- suing researches at the Institute. As its capacity is limited, prefer- ence will be given to those engaged in research which must be carried on at the Farm. Available space, however, may be occupied by mem- bers of the staff or laboratory guests who are working in the Institute’s laboratories in Philadelphia. The Farm House will be open all the year. The farm is located four miles from Bristol, Bucks County, Penn- sylvania, thirty miles from Philadel- phia, six miles south of Trenton. Morning and evening trains will be met at Bristol by the Farm automobile. Excellent train service is maintained by the Pennsylvania Railroad between West Philadel- phia and Bristol. Rates for board and room at the Farm House are from $16.00 to $18.00 per week according to loca- tion of room. This rate includes taxi service to and from trains reg- ularly met at Bristol. Board without room is $12.00 per week for men engaged in research at the Institute’s laboratories. The number accepted will be limited by the seating capacity of the Dining. Room. Residents of the Farm House may invite guests under the usual club rules when space is available. Arrangements for Residence at the Farm House should be made at the ADMINISTRATION OFFICE of The Wistar Institute 36th Street and Woodland Avenue Philadelphia Protoplasm Colloidal Chemistry of Considered I. The Viscosity of Amoeba Protoplasm at Different Temperatures II. Further Study of the Surface Precipitation Reaction. ye IDs WE We Dr. Heilbrunn delivered vapers ning seminar on July 16. The author by Dr. Marie A. Hinrichs, research versity of Chicago, are printed here, HEILBRUNN bearing the above titles at the eve- ‘s summaries together with a review associate in physiology at the Uni- COLLOIDAL CHEMISTRY OF PROTOPLASM CONSIDERED The movement of an ameba is a relatively simple biological process. 3ecause of its simplicity, biologists have not infrequently attempted | physical explanations. In any such explanation, or in any calculation of the forces involved, the viscosity of the interior protoplasm is an 1m-| portant factor. Several years ago, Pantin published experiments on the effect of temperature on the rate of movement of a marine ameba. In interpreting his experiments, Pantin made some interesting calculations of the physical forces at play. He assumed the viscosity of the ameba protoplasm to be 1000 times that of water, and he also assumed that the viscosity decreased progressively with rise of temperature. In Amocba dubia, centrifuge tests show the absolute viscosity of the interior protoplasm at 18° to be approximately twice that of water. Below 18°, the viscosity rises rather steeply, increasing six or seven fold as the temperature falls below 12°. Ahove 18°, the viscosity instead of decreasing, rises to a maximum at 25° and then falls again. At 25°, the viscosity is ap- proximately six times that of water. The viscosity temperature curve is thus totally unlike that of any known inanimate fluid, but closely parallels the curve obtained some years ago for the protoplasm of the Cuningia egg. In Amoeba proteus, the proto- plasm in the center of the cell has approximately the same viscosity as the protoplasm of A. dubia. There is, however, a sharply defined cor- tical region, (plasmagel of Mast), in which the protoplasm has a much higher viscosity. FURTHER STUDY OF THE SURFACE PRECIPITATION REACTION The study of the colloidal chemis- try of protoplasm has shown that in its physical behavior, proto- plasm is like no known colloid. Some of the peculiarities of the living substance are due to a speci- fic reaction shown by many types of protoplasm. This reaction is most easily studied at the cut sur- faces of cells, but it may also occur through the entire cell. In the latter instance the reaction can be shown to be closely related to the changes which occur when protoplasm is stimulated. Naked protoplasm forms a film about itself, and this film formation has been called the surface precipi- tation reaction. In many different types of cells from various phyla of animals, the reaction can be shown to require the presence of calcium. In some cells, definite granules can be seen to play a role. Thus in the Chactopterus egg, the pigment granules are involved. On the other hand, the pigment granules of the Cumingia egg are not important, and the reaction proceeds quite in- dependently of them. In those instances in which the first phase of the surface: precipita- tion involves a disappearance of granules in the presence of calcium, it has been possible to gain some in- sight into the real nature of the re- action, or at least to obtain some suggestive clues regarding it. For in this case it has been possible to make a chemical or a_ physico- chemical study of a protoplasmic reaction in definite relation to cer- tain morphological elements of the protoplasm. The reaction is retarded and finally inhibited by increasing concentra- tion of salts. Not all salts act with equal power, and the various ions can be shown to follow a lyotropic series. Comparison may be made with the observations of Arrhenius on the effect of different ions on the hydrolysis of an ester. The reaction is apparently in- dependent of pH, but if the con- centration of calcium is low, it can be shown that the speed of the re- action is greatest between pH 8 and g. It is difficult to understand how the presence of calcium can cause the disappearance of granules. As a working hypothesis, it is proposed that the calcium acts as an activa- tor of a lipase. This is in accor- dance with the known behavior of calcium. Experiments now in pro- gress on the effects of heat, favor the view that the solution of the granules is due to a lipase. If our working hypothesis is cor- rect, it fits in very well with the view first expressed in 1926, that the typical protoplasmic micelle, or the typical protoplasmic granule is a protein particle surrounded by a lipoid film. There is thus a grow- ing body of evidence that the peculiarities in the physical be- havior of the living substance are due in a considerable measure to this type of organization. Ss MONOBJECTIVE BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE With readily interchangeable binocular and monocular tubes MICROSCOPE DSA-1 Stand DSA with simplified Me- chanical Stage and Quadruple Nosepiece; Condenser n.a. 1.2 with Iris Diaphragm, Achromatic Ob- jectives: 3.8 n.a. 0.20, 40 n.a. 0.65, 90 n.a. 1.25 (Oil Immersion). Paired Huygens Oculars: 10x and 15x. Magnifications: 30x to 1350x. Bricey$22but. On. Ney. MICROSCOPE DSA-2 Same stand as DSA, but with apla- natic condenser n.a. 1.4 and Apo- chromatic Objectives: 10 n.a. 0.30, 20 n.a. 0.65, 40 n.a. 0.95 and 90 n.a. 1.3 (Oil Immersion). Paired Com- pensating Oculars: 7x, 10x and 15x. Magnifications: 70x to 1350x. Price $400.50 f. 0. b. N. Y. A selection of Zeiss Instruments will be ON EXHIBITION at Woods Hole July 29 - Aug. 3 CARL ZEISS, INc. 485 Fifth Avenue New York Pacific Coast Branch: 728 South Hill Sreet, Los Angeles. ey PAGE EIGHT Look for our Exhibit ‘e August Ist to 12th BEE TORE EVAL SPALTEHOLZ TRANSPARENT PREPARATIONS HUMAN AND ZOOLOGICAL MODELS GHARTS SREEPELONS ETC. MR. J. A. KYLE in charge e CLAY-ADAMS CoO. IMPORTERS AND WHOLESALE DISTRIBUTORS 119 EAST 24th STREET NEW YORK CITY THE COLLECTING NET REVIEW By Dr. Marie A. Hrnricus Research Associate in Physiology, University of Chicago Heilbrunn has for many years been concerned with the study of the nature of protoplasm. Witness his numerous papers on the sub- ject, and his book of recent date. He. speaks with authority on this most fundamental question, and is particularly to be identified with viscosity studies. (For many years, the sound of the turning centrifuge has been a fairly safe guide to the location of Heilbrunn’s room on the third floor of the Brick Buuld- ing. ) Knowing this, we can forgive the occasional forcefulness of the “‘re- tort courteous” during the spirited discussion periods. We are grate- ful to the chairman for his wisdom in allotting a separate discussion period for each paper. Many points were cleared up then, which due to lack of time, were not treated as fully in the main presentations as they deserved. In the first paper, a good deal was said about the viscosity of Amoeba dubia, and a curve was drawn for the viscosity-temperature relations. While at the present time no explanation is offered for the irregularity of the curve, the speaker did point out the agreement between the low point in the curve at. which this Amoeba lives. Also, the suggestion that the curve for Cumingia eggs resembles that for Amocba dubia, but with a ten de- gree shift, was correlated with the difference in the normal living con- was also called to the similarity of the curve in some respects to that for protoplasmic streaming. It would be interesting in this connec- tion to have a correlation between amoeboid movement and viscosity relations. The second paper, in a slightly different field, indicated the similar- ity of the injury phenomenon to that of the normal activation of protoplasm, suggesting such studies as those on the activation of Echi- noderm eggs, in which R. S. Lillie showed activation to be primarily a surface phenomenon. The analysis of cell-breakdown in Arbacia has a close parallelism in blood coagulation effects. The breakdown of blood platelets may be considered as analogous to the breakdown of pigment granules in Arbacia eggs. Calcium is neces- sary for both the surface precipita- tion of Arbacia pigment granules, | coagulation of blood, and low tem- | peratures inhibit both processes. Temperatures as high as 50 de- grees, and above, cause a stabilisa- tion of Arbacia pigment granules, and prevent the surface precipita- tion reaction. at 18 degrees, and the temperature ditions of the two forms. Attention | "SUTE NO! |an infectious process. |the bone marrow is stimulated by |infection there is an outpouring of Schilling Index of Value as Indication of Infection Assistant Visiting Physician, Dr. seminar on July 16. THE RESPONSE OF (POLYMORPHONUCLEAR) LEUCOCYTES TO THE STIMULUS OF INFECTION By Dr. Paut REZNIKOFF Instructor of Medicine, Cornell University Medical College, Adjunct Bellevue Hospital, N. Y. C. Rezinkoff delivered a paper bearing the above title at the evening The author’s summary together with a review by Dr. E. B. Krumboar, professor of pathology, are printed here. Whenever clinical phenomena permit quantitative measurements, they merit the attention of biolog- ists. Blood counts have long been used in physiological and patholo- gical work, both routinely and for | experimental investigation. The number of white cells per cubic millimeter of blood and the percent of the various types of cells (dif- ferential) has been considered an index of a normal state and a clue, to any deviations from this normal. A typical text-book account of an infectious disease such as pneumo- | nia or appendicitis describes certain local and general symptoms and signs, a rise in temperature and an increase in white blood cells, parti- cularly the polymorphonuclear cell. However, actual investigation shows that this increase of cells is not constant enough to serve as an index of the severity of infection or the probable outcome of the disease. Thus in 200 patients studied, most of whom had infections, fully 50 percent had total counts of less than 10,000, a moderately high normal count. Likewise if the in- crease of polymorphonuclear cells is considered, 30 percent of the patients had 7O percent or less of this form of white blood cell, a figure not generally associated with In 1904 Arneth presented a scheme, based on the maturity of the polymorphonuclear cell, which seemed to offer more help in an at- tempt to utilize cell count as an index to disease. Since then Schil- ling has simplified the method so that it is as easily performed as the ordinary total white blood cell and differential counts. The youngest polymorphonuclear cell that appears in the blood, is a myelocyte and has a perfectly round nucleus. An indented or kidney shaped nucleus is found in the next order stage. In a still older cell the nucleus is band- like. These three types of cells may be called immature. The ma- ture polymorphonuclear leucocyte has a segmented nucleus, hence its name. In the normal individual the peripheral blood contains from 5 to 10 percent band forms and from 50 to 65 percent segmented forms and no younger types. When younger forms. If a tabulation of the cells is arranged in a line ac- cording to age, the youngest cells at the left and the oldest at the right, it is convenient to speak of an increase in young forms as a shift to the left and a return to normal as a shift back to the right. A normal individual has approxi- mately from 5 to 10 percent of all his cells immature polymorpho- nuclear cells and never has more than 20 percent of all his polymor- phonuclear cells immature. In this study 99 percent of the infected patients had more than 10 percent of their total number of cells im- mature and only 96 percent of the infected patients had more than 20 percent of all their polymorphonu- clears immature. A study of individual conditions indicates that with the onset of an infection like pneumonia there is a great outpouring of immature cells (shift to the left). If the patient recovers a gradual shift back to the right occurs so that eventually a normal distribution of cells results. If the patient’s condition is poor . and he eventually dies, the out- pouring of immature cells in- creases so that before death the shift to the left is markedly accen- tuated. If a complication, like pleurisy, ensues during the course of the infection there is an increase in the number of immature cells which persist until the local condi- tion improves. This sudden res- ponse of the bone marrow often precedes any complaint of the patient or a rise in temperature by several hours. A few interesting and important illustrations of the value of the Schilling Index might be cited. In cerebrospinal meningitis, a trouble- some feature is the sickness which follows the administration of serum. Often this is not considered and the patient is suspected of having a relapse. However in the case of serum sickness no shift to the left occurs and the therapeutic measures as well as the danger, where such a differential diagnosis can be made, is radically different. REVIEW By Dr. E. B. KRUMBHAAR Professor of Pathology, University of Pennsylvama It is now a quarter of a century since Arneth first announced that the age of the human polymorpho- nuclear neutro-phile could be de- termined by the number of its lobes and pointed out various practical applications of this observation in clinical diagnosis and prognosis. (Continued on Page 9) THE COLLECTING a KRUMBHAAR REVIEW (Continued from Page 8) And yet when we come to examine the evidence on which this state- ment is based, it is still far from satisfactory. The number of lobes of the ‘polys’” found in the bone- | marrow—where oe cell is manu- factured—is said to be smaller than of those found in the peripheral blood; but it is difficult to get an accurate quantitative picture of the bone-marrow cytological status and also some of the cells found in bone- marrow preparations have undoubt- | ; edly emerged into the general cir- culation and just happen to be caught in the picture while circula- | ting through the marrow. This, of course, would do no more than ob- scure the truth of the general ob- servation that nuclear lobes were fewer in the bone-marrow “poly” Objection can properly be made to the technical difficulty of properly grading the number of lobes by the ‘Arneth method, and it also must be recognized that some minor swelling or constrictions of the nuclear chromatin may be artifacts pro- duced in the preparation of the dried and stained spread. One of | the various simplifications of the Arneth method for this reason, as well as on account of greater ease of performance of the simpler methods, seems preferable as a clinical test. In fact, if emphasis be placed on the nuclear threads of the segmented forms as a sign of pyknosis and thus of deterioration or aging of the cell, then the simpler classification into old and young forms, such as proposed by Pons and myself several years ago, (J.) Lab. and Clin. Med., Nov. 1924), and used by Dr. Reznikoff in his| charts, has even better justification than the original Arneth method or | even the Schilling modification. It| also brings the test into the group f “clinical” tests: even the clinical | laboratory beginner or hospital in- terne can readily be taught in mak- ing a ‘‘differential” leucocyte count to include one more class than is customary by dividing “‘polys” into old and young on the basis of the presence or absence of nuclear segmentation by threads. While, as I have just indicated, no definite proof exists that the number of lobes is proportionate to the age of the cell, we at least know that the form of the nucleus as seen in the stained spread is not a mat- ter of chance fixation of the cell at a given moment, but is a true characteristic of that particular cell. For instance, it was found several years ago in my laboratory that vitally stained living leucocy- tes, with motility preserved in a warm chamber, each retained a characteristic shape of its nucleus, no matter to what stress it had been put in squeezing through narrow channels and so on. Doan, too, in a study of leucocytic nuclear form fin ‘chamber | single ‘ |shift to the left occurs. in various organs has presented evidence tending to show that those the bone-marrow had younger shaped nuclei than in other organs but that they did not continue to age after leaving the bone marrow ; i. e., an old cell in the blood stream had become old before leaving the bone marrow, and a cell leaving the bone marrow as a young cell re- mained “young” as to nuclear form until it was destroyed. In the re- latively short time that we were able to keep cells alive in the warm (6 or 8 hours), no sign of aging of the nucleus was found. Dr. Reznikoff’s tables present more material confirming the prac- ical value of this simple hematolo- gical test. Doubtless he could also have presented examples such as occur in Schilling’s book where the | same total leucocyte count and per- centage of “polys’ in several cases assume quite different significance when the further differentiation in- to old and young forms made. To raise one or two adverse critic- is isms (if only to avoid Dr. Heil- brunn’s censure!), I would ‘‘de- plore” Schilling’s tendency to magnify the importance of his hemogram, even to the extent of omitting the total leucocyte count and would also point out in the pneumonit table that Dr. Reznikoff showed, that although the biggest 5,000 group” may have been between 5,000 and 10,000 leucocytes per cu. mm., nevertheless a great | majority of his patients showed leucocytoses of varying amounts over 10,000. Gastro-intestinal upsets frequent- ly are difficult to distinguish from acute appendicitis. Upon the cor- rect diagnosis depends surgical in- tervention and life or death. In the case of a gastro-intestinal upset no In appen- dicitis there is a marked shift to the} \left. Diseases like tuberculosis, ty- phoid fever, and acute infectious mononucleosis are usually consider- ed conditions in which the polymor- phonuclear count is of no particular value. However, a Schilling count shows a marked shift to the left in all these conditions indicating that the principle of immature cell re- sponse is probably universal for acute infection. This problem, in so far as it re- presents the response of an organ- ism to a changing environment by means of a process which permits quantitative measurements, is es- sentially a biological question and is capable of scientific analysis. Dr. Willis Whitney, director of research at the laboratories of the General Electric Company spent the night of July 25 at the Break- water Hotel. Dr. Whitney looked over the laboratory and expressed his great interest in it- With him he brought a machine for producing radio waves of high frequency which Dr. Mavor will use in his experi- mental work. NET PAGE NINE NATURAL HISTORY SPECIMENS The Depart- ment recently secured a fine lot of Euplectella and also Preserved Bullfrogs Supply has We are offering attractive prices on Ammocoetes, the lar- preserved and injected bullfrogs. vae of the lamprey > eel, as well as other We shall be glad to make quota- interesting forms. tions or send our zoological cata- logue. A large stock of zoological, botani- cal material and miscroscope Th slides on sale. e Orders solicited now for fall de- livery. Southwestern Biological Supply House 211 South Polk St. For further information apply at the Supply Department Office. Dallas, Texas Catalogues on request. FANZ AUTOMATIC MICROTOME KNIFE SHARPENER MICROTOME KNIFE SHARPENER, Fanz Automatic, for automatically honing microtome knives. Consisting of a plate glass disc, 18 inches diameter, with motor drive, and counter- poised knife holder with automatic reciprocal motion. The knife holder can be adjusted to any desired angle and the pressure of application of the knife to the plate controlled by counterpoise. A great reduction in time as compared with hand honing and a superiority in the cutting edge is accomplished by the use of this device. As suggested by Dr. J. I. Fanz, Professor of Pathology and Bacteriology, Medical School, Temple University, Philadelphia, Penna., and to be described by him in a forthcoming article. 7204. Microtome Knife Sharpener, Fanz Automatic, eribed, complete with two plate glass discs, 36 paper discs, one pound each of specially selected emery, red rouge, and Castile soap, 4% pound of white rouge, and 2 bottles of Diamantine powder, two camel’s hair brushes, and six test as above des- tubes. With directions for use and motor for 110 volts, 60 CY ClOS4 Gales Comme tear eet aetet ate ens mcafee aiete rol al.che A : Per 50 ounces, 2 ‘ discount WILL CORPORATION LABORATORY APPARATUS AND CHEMICALS CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL,METALLU RGICAL AND CLINICAL LABORATORIES ROCHESTER, NY. THE COLLECTING NET NET Just Out A new second edition of BOT Ay PRINCIPLES AND PROBLEMS BY EpmMuNp W. SINNOTT Professor of Botany, Barnard College, Columbia University McGraw-Hill Publications in the Agricultural and Botanical Sciences One hundred and eighty-five colleges adopted the first edition of this ‘“question-problem-discussion” text. The book was widely welcomed as an important forward step in the pres- entation of the essential facts which should find their place in an elementary botany course. In this new second edition the entire text has been care- fully rewritten and brought up to date. The text has been somewhat increased in length, but not markedly so. The number of illustrations has been increased consider- ably. The questions for thought and discussion have been thoroughly revised and some new ones included, although the total number has been slightly reduced. The reference problems have been considerably increased in number. The author says, “As before, the text is primarily adapted to one- semester codecs! but I have used it this year in a full year’s course and have found plenty of material in it. I feel that it can readily be used both for shorter and longer courses, depending on the amount of time devoted to the questions and problems.” RECENT McGRAW-HILL BIOLOGICAL BOOKS Wardle—Problems of Applied Entomology By Rorert A. Warn te, Professor of Zoology, University of Manitoba, formerly Associate Professor of Entomology, Uni- versity of Minnesota and Lecturer in Economic Zoology, University of Manchester. 587 pages, 6x 9, 31 illustrations. $6.00 Graham—Principles of Forest Entomology 3y Samurr A. Grawam, Associate Professor of Forest En- tomology, University of Michigan; Agent, U. S. Dept. of Agriculture, Bureau of Entomology. McGraw-Hill Publica- tions in the Zoological Sciences. 339 pages, 6x9, 149 illustrations. $3.50 Weldon—Economic Biology By Georce P. WeEtpon, Jnstructor in Biology, Entomology and Pomology, Chaffey Union High School and Junior College. Ontario, Calif. McGraw-Hill Vocational Texts. 457 pages, 544 x 8, 191 illustrations. $2.50 Fred and Waksman—Laboratory Manual of General Microbi- ology—with Special Reference to the Microorganisms of the Soil 3y Epwin B. Frep, Professor of Agricultural Bacteriology, University of Wisconsin, and SELMAN A. WaxkSMAN. ASso- ciate Professor. of Soil Microbiology, Rutgers University. 145 pages, 5% x 8, illustrated. $2.00 Metcalf and Flint — Destructive and Useful Insects — Their Habits and Control 3y C. L. Mercarr, Professor of Entomology, University of Illinois, and W. P. Frnt, Chief Entomologist, Illinois State Natural History Pas McGraw-Hill Publications im the Zoological Sciences . 918 pages, 6x 9, 561 illustrations. $7.50 Send for these new books on approval McGRAW-HILL BOOK CO., Inc. 370 SEVENTH AVENUE, NEW YORK Volume IV. Number 7 CONGRESS WILL BE OPENED BY KROGH ON MONDAY EVENING Two hundred members of the XIIth International Physiological Congress and more than fifty wives and children of members are sched- uled to arrive in Boston this after- noon on board the S. S. Minnekahda from London and _ Boulogne. Twenty two countries are repre- sented in the list of physiologists who are passengers. This party is the first large group of foreign members to arrive in Boston. This morning on the Fall River Line a party of sixty Germans arrived in Boston from New York. Tomor- row a group of thirty or forty members of the French delegation will reach this city. Each party will be met by busses which will carry those members to Cambridge who are living in the dormitories of Harvard University. The delegates on board the S. S. Minnekahda are from twenty-two countries: Austria, Belgium, China, Czechoslovakia, Denmark, Egypt, England, Finland, France, Ger- many, Greece, Holland, Hungary, Ireland, Japan, Poland, Russia, Scotland, Spain, Sweden, Switzer- land, and Wales. Of these, 11 del- egates have been designated as of- ficial delegates by their respective countries. The leaders of the group are Professor Filippo Bottazzi of the Institute of Physiology at Naples, Italy, and Professor Archi- bald Vivian Hill of University Col- lege, London, England, who are the two members of the International Committee of the Congress aboard. Unfortunately Dr. Hill will be un- able to visit Woods Hole on Sat- urday. Seven countries have official del- egates on board, representatives of their governments to the Congress. They are Associate Professor G. Ahlgren of the Physiological Insti- tute of the University of Upsala, | Sweden; Professor Filippo Bottazzi| as a representative of Italy; Pro- fessor A. Hassan of the Medical School of Cairo, Egypt; Professor Amadeo Herlitzka, Professor of Physiology at Turin, Italy, and one of Italy’s representatives; Profes- sor of Physiology at Turin, Italy, and one of Italy's representatives ; Professor G. Joachimoglu of the Medical Academy of Athens,Greeze ; Dr. D. Lo Monaco, Director of the Institute of Chemical Physiology, (Continued on Page 3) WOODS HOLE, MASS., A. B. L. Calendar Tuesday, August 20, 8:00 P. M. Evening Seminar. Dr. Mary S. Mac- Dougall, ‘Modifications in Chilo- don uncinatus Produced by Ultra-violet Radiation.” Miss Rachael Bowling, “Conjuga- of Distomatous Individuals of Glaucoma scintillans.” Dr. Gary N. Calkins, “Chromo- somes in Uroleptus Holseyi.” Dr. J. A. Dawson, ‘‘Motion Pictures of Living Protozoa.” Friday, August 23, 8:00 P. M. Evening Lecture. Dr. K. J. Belar, Kaiser Wilhelm Institute fir Biologie, 3erlin-Dahlem. “TIn- tion vestigations on the Structure and Function of the Mitotic Spindle.” Saturday, August 24, 4:00-6:00 P.M. For visiting physiologists, M. 3. L. Club and Fish Commission Residence. Museum of Co SATURDAY, AUGUST 17, 1929 Subscription $1.25 Single Copies, 20c Validity of Goldschmidt’s Theory Tested in Aphids ON Dr. Shull delivered a seminar on August 6. Dr. Whiting, paper is printed here. INTERMEDIATE APHIDS AND GOLDSCHMIDT’S THEORY INTERSEXES 3y Dr. A. FRANKLIN SHULL Professor of Zoology, University of Michigan bearing The author’s summary, together with a review by the above title at the evening multiple allelomorphs. Goldschmidt’s theory of sex postulates a quantitative yetween the sexes, determined for different individuals by a series of Development one sex requires that the quantity difference of ( of of be characters involved ) the typical whatever is greater than a certain minimum; development of typical characters of the other sex require this quantity to be less than a certain max- imum. When the quantity falls mparative Zoologn, GCAMBRIDUE, MA oe (623 THE BEGINNING OF A LETTER WRITTEN BY AGASSIZ A HITHERTO UNPUBLISHED LETTER WRITTEN LOUIS RUDOLPH AGASSIZ ON HATTIE SAWYER. BY JEAN SEPTEMBER 20, 1873, TO MISS WE ARE UNDER OBLIGATIONS TO DR. ABBY H. TURNER FOR HER KINDNESS IN LOANING US A PHOTOSTATIC CCPY FOR REPRODUCTION. SHE OBTAINED IT FROM CHIEF JUSTICE WILLIAM H. SAWYER OF NEW HAMPSHIRE, AND THE LETTER IS WRITTEN TO HIS SISTER. MR. SAWYER VIVIDLY RE- CALLS AGASSIZ FROM HIS BOYHOOD DAYS AND RELATES HIS EXPERIENCES IN AN INTERESTING LETTER TO DR. TURNER. UNFORTUNATELY SPACE DOES NOT PERMIT THE PRINTING OF HIS LETTER. THE REMAINDER OF AGASSIZ’S LETTER WILL BE FOUND ON PAGE 4. between the ranges necessary for typical sex development, intersexes are produced. These intermediate individuals are held to commence {their development as of one sex, and to finish it as of the other sex. Organs whose embryonic deter- mination occurs early, before the turning point, should be characteris- tic of the sex toward which the early development proceeds, while those determined after the turning point should be characteristic of the other sex. Whether the intersex most resembles the one sex or the other depends on whether the turn- ing point occurs early or late. Considerable emphasis is laid upon this “time law” in Goldschmidt’s later discussions of intersexes. Certain species of animals exhibit ditnorphism not related to sex, and intermediate forms are sometimes produced. The aphids are an example, in that two structurally different kinds of female, the gamic and the parthenogenetic, occur, and that intermediate forms are oc- casionally produced in nature and may be experimentally obtained in numbers. On a priori grounds, the theory proposed by Goldschmidt to account for intersexes, especially the “time law’’, is as likely to be applicable to these intermediate aphids as it is to intersexes. The following study was undertaken to test the validity of the hypothesis as applied to other forms than sexes. The aphids are especially suitable for such a test, because the agent involved environmental instead of genetic, and hence can be applied at any time of development ; because the change can be made from one type to the other in both directions at will; and because the homologies of the structures in the two forms is (Continued on Page 2) PAGE TWO Goldschmidt’s Theory (Continued from Page 1) are not in any case in doubt. The gamic females of aphids are] fa produced regularly by winged|be in harmony with the time law. mothers at low temperature. They} That is by assuming that embryos possess, in the species studied,|of the various types are present brown antennae, brown, swollen}and that the temperature selects hind tibiae which are covered with which ones shall be born. With an | sensoria, and a yellow body. The} ovary consisting of numerous dis- reproductive system consists of /tinct ovarioles, this selective action ovarioles containing, in young/on birth is conceivable. In the adults, one large opaque egg and|experiments described, it would in- Sometimes a second just beginning|volve a delay of 28 days in the its growth, and ending in a large birth of a larva. So great a retar- spherical germarium forming a con- | dation seems unlikely, but con- spicious knob. Attached to the | clusive evidence tor oe against it common oviduct is a pair of colle- will require additional experimenta- terial glands and a spermatheca. In/Hon: contrast to these, winged females} If such selective action on birth reared at high temperature produce | does not occur, the combintions of parthenogenetic daughters. These | characters in the intermediates can daughters have pale antennae, pale | be better explained as dependent on and slender hind _ tibiae without | the stage to which some physiologi- sensoria, and green bodies. The} cal process has attained at a critical ovarioles of the reproductive system | moment in the embryonic develop- contain usually six or more trans-| ment. If this process is a reversible lucent embryos and eggs of dimin-|one, a certain level of it could be ishing size from base to tip, and | reached either from the partheno- have at the end a very small | genetic extreme or trom the gamic germarium. There are no colle- | extreme. If a given combination terial glands and no spermatheca on) 0! the distinguishing characters the common oviduct. Intermediates showing various|this process, it would make no| srades of the above characters were difference from which extreme that cbtained when winged mothers, |level had been reached. The time} growing first at low temperature, |!aw, on the contrary, requires dif- were transferred to high tempera-| ferent results from the two direc- ture, Their offspring were collect-| tions ot change. ed at intervals, separately reared, and examined when adult with REVIEW- respect to these characters. The — earliest offspring to show an effect By Dr. P. W. WHITING of the change were altered with} Associate Professor of Zoology respect to the characters of the University of Pittsburgh antennae and hind tibiae. Changes — ot the body color and reproductive} Dr. Shull’s interesting series of system came later. Within the|experiments with Aphids is a note- reproductive system, the colleterial} worthy contribution to our know- glands and spermatheca first disap-| ledge of parthenogenesis and sex- peared, then the ovarioles changed. |determination. In the present If the time law holds, the above|instance we are concerned with the facts mean that the ovarioles are| difference between the gamic and the embryonically determined first, the|parthenogenetic female but the colleterial glands and spermatheca|phenomena may be grouped with shortly thereafter, the color of the|caste-determination as in termites body about simultaneously with the|and Hymenoptera, as well as with reproductive system, and the anten-|sex-determination in the strict nal and tibial characters last. When | sense. the change of type of individual is} A sort of “all-or-none” law ap- effected in the reverse direction, by} pears to dominate both in sex- éhanging the winged parents from) determination and in caste-determi- high to low temperature, the order|nation but intergrades are never- of determination should be the|theless more or less frequent. same, and the order of change of|Causes of intergradation as well as the several characters in successive|causes determining the normal groups of offspring should be the| swing to one or the other extreme same as that described in the pre-|may in some instances be genetic, ceding paragraph. This was not the order, however,|apparently no principle underlying THE COLLECTING NET to indicate that the time law does not hold in intermediate aphids. There is one way in which these cts could be explained and still resulted from the given level of ‘in others environmental. There is when the change was made from|sex and caste-determination, dis- parthenogenetic to gamic daughters. |tinguishing these phenomena from The body color and reproductive! other types of variation which may system changes more rapidly than!be continuous or more or less dis- the antennal and tibial characters.|continuous. Intergrades may be And in the reproductive system, the) totally absent or relatively frequent. colleterial glands changed (appear-| Dr. Shull makes comparisons ed, in this case), not first, but only| between his case in Aphids and! after the ovarioles were almost|Goldschmidt’s theory of intersexes| strictly gamic. This order appears (Continued on Page 3) A survey text on biology emphasizing the fundamental principles common to all living things teaching biology from the cultural view- point showing the place and function of biology in modern thought The book shows the place and function of the science of biology in modern thought. It tries to get over the fundamental unity of all life—in animals, plants and man. It teaches biology as one of the humanities of today. The book is important for its viewpoint and for its selection of material to impress this viewpoint. Fundamentals of Biology By Artuur W. Haupt Assistant Professor of Botany, University of California at Los Angeles McGRAW-HILL PUBLICATIONS IN THE ZOOLOGICAL SCIENCES 358 pages, 6x9, 256 illustrations, $3.00 This text offers a clear presentation of funda- mental facts and principles carefully selected from the whole field of modern biology, without undue emphasis upon: any one phase of the subject, and with particular attention to those topics which are of considerable cultural value. It presents a point of view which serves to give it a definite purpose and to effect its organization. The thread of continuity upon which the facts are strung is the “unity of life’ conception. The cul- tural importance of the idea that all life is one— that certain fundamental facts, processes and principles are common to both plants and animals, including man, is stressed. Professor Haupt’s FUNDAMENTALS OF BroLoGy is intended to serve as the basis of an orientation course—to give a broad perspective of the field of modern biology. Send for a copy on approval McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc. Penn. Terminal Building 370 Seventh Avenue New York THE COLLECTING NET PUBLISHED BY HOEBER ; FOR THE BIOLOGIST - McClung’s HANDBOOK OF Microscopical Technique For Workers in Both Animal and Plant Tissues By Wm. H. F. Apptson, Ezra ALLEN, Jos. L. APPLETON, JR., ROBERT CHAMBERS, Witiam V. Cone, Haroip J. Conn, Epmunp V. Cowpry, Utric DaHLGREN, Hat Downey, SopHia H. Eckerson, N. CHANDLER Foote, ROBERT T. HANCE, Cuester H. Heuser, RAPHAEL Isaacs, FRANK B. MALLORY, CLARENCE E. McCiuna, JosepHine W. McNass, FREDERICK ParKER, JR., WILDER PENFIELD, FLORENCE R. Sasin, P. G. Surprey, ErHet M. Super, Wm. RANDOLPH TayLor, D. H. WenrRICH. Epitep sy C. E. McCLUNG, PuD. Professor of Zoology, and Director of Zoological Laboratory, University of Pennsylvania LARGE 8vO, WATERPROOF STURDITE, ILLUSTRATED - $8.00 net Eugenical News says: “The book is attractively printed and it is bound with conditions of the laboratory work-table in mind. 17 witt DOUBTLESS BE RECOGNIZED FOR YEARS TO COME AS A STANDARD BOOK ON THE SUBJECT.” The Journal of the American Medical Association says: “THE BOOK IS UP TO DATE AND IS TO BE RECOMMENDED AS A HAND~ BOOK WHICH STUDENTS OF TECHNIQUE WILL FIND VALUABLE.” American Journal of Public Health says: “Tt should be in the library of every public health laboratory and laboratory technician. . . . It shows evidence of careful editing and the effort to include minor practical details of manipulation on which the succes:ful preparation of excellent microscopical preparations so often depends. IT Is QUITE UP TO DATE IN THE INCLUSION OF RECENTLY DEVEL’ OPED FIELDS AND SPECIAL METHODS.” Anatomical Record says: “Whether one be a beginner seeking general information or a spe- cialist comparing particular processes, his needs are taken care of in one volume not too large to be conveniently handled.” Cowdry’s Special Cytology The Form & Functions of the Cell in Health & Disease A TExTBOoK FoR STUDENTS OF Brotocy & MeEpIcINE By Lesuiz B. Arey, Percivat BaiLey, R. R. BeNsLey, C. H. BUNTING, ALExIs CarreL, A. E. Coun, G. W. Corner, E. V. Cowpry, Hat Downey, G. Cart Huser, J. AtBert Key, E.B. KRuMBHAAR, ALBERT Kuntz, LEo Logs, C. C. MAcKLIN, M. T. Mackti, E. F. Martone, Frank C. Mann, Davip Marine, A. A. Maximow, Epwarp B. Meics, C. W. Metz, W.S. Mitter, Eucene L. Opre, WILDER PENFILD, A. T. Rasmussen, J. PARsons SCHAEFFER, G. E. SHAMBAUGH, P. G. SHIPLEY, G. N. Stewart, CHartes R. Stockarp, D. L. STORMONT, FREDERICK TILNEY, T. Wincate Topp, G. B. WIsLockt. Epirep By EDMUND V. COWDRY Professor of Cytology, Washington University, St. Louis 2 VOLS., LARGE 8VO, WATERPROOF STURDITE, 1376 PP..693 ILLUS. $20.00 net. The Eugenical News says: * panel “A BOOK EVERY BIOLOGIST WILL WANT TO OWN... . The latest lit- erature is here copiously referred to.... The greatest American con- tribution to the encyclopedias of histology.” {There has not been a single adverse criticism of this work, the worst that any one has found to say about it is that: ‘‘the contributions are not all of equal value!’’} Our 112 page Caratocue and Circulars will be sent on request. PAUL B» HOEBER ®* PUBLISHERS 76 FIFTH AVENUE tA NEW YORK Publishers of Annals of Medical History; The American Journal of Surgery; The American Journal of Roentgenology and Radium Therapy; Annals of Roentgenology, etc. WHITING REVIEW (Continued from Page 2) in Lymantria. In both instances intergrades occur in two series. In Lymantria one series consists of female intersexes showing male traits, the other series consists of male intersexes showing female traits. In Aphids one series ranges from the parthenogenetic to the gamic, the other series ranges in the reverse direction. Goldschmidt’s time law states that a turning point in development occurs before which traits of one sex appear and after which traits of the other sex appear. The earlier this turning point, the greater the degree of intersexuality. The time law is not a physiological specula- tion as Dr. Shull seems to think but a formulation of a fact. The time law seems not to apply to intergrading Aphids. Dr. Shull suggests a reversible physiologic process supposing that a certain level may be reached, either from the parthenogenetic extreme or from the gamic extreme. This level determines a given combination of the distinguishing characters. To the reviewer this speculation appears to add little in the sense of a real explanation. It might however, be of interest to consider possible ef- fects of change of temperature on relative speed of development of different structures. The variations under considera- tion in Lymantria differ in several respects from those in Aphids. We have difference between the sexes rather than difference within one sex; genetic factors determining the two series, as well as position in each respective series, rather than the environmental differences in temperature; a more or less definite turning point in development rather than independence of different sys- tems as affected by temperature change. With so many differences involved, a commion law of develop- ment is, on a priori grounds, very dubious. PHYSIOLOGICAL CONGRESS OPENS MONDAY EVENING (Continued from Page 1) Rome, Italy, Professor John O. Olow of the University of Upsala, Sweden; Professor Z. A. Orbeli of the Medical Institute, Leningrad, Russia; Professor Jacob K. Parnas of the Faculty of Medicine, The University, Lwow, Poland, and Professor Carl Tigerstedt of the Physiology Laboratory, Helsingfors, Finland. Elaborate arrangements have been made to receive the incoming mem- bers and their families. The dor- mitories of Harvard University will be open to receive guests tomorrow morning. At the Harvard Medical School a post office, a telegraph and cable office and a telephone office have been opened to care for the PAGE THREE members. A bank and an office of Thomas Cook and Son have been also installed. Throughout the Con- gress busses will carry members be- tween the dormitories in Cambridge and the Harvard Medical School. Five hundred or more members and the families of many of them are expected from abroad by Mon- day evening, and an equal or greater number of members are en- rolled from this country. The opening meeting of the Congress will be held on Monday evening, at 8:15 o'clock in Sanders Theatre, Memorial \Hall, Cambridge. Fol- lowing the meeting in Sanders The- atre there will be a reception by the Harvard Corporation to the mem- bers of the Congress in Harvard Yard. There will be music and re- freshments. Admission will be by ticket and to members and sociate members only. From Tuesday morning until Friday noon scientific sessions will be held in the Auditoria of the Har- vard Medical School, the High School of Commerce, and the Peter Bent Brigham Hospital. The meet- ings will run from 9 until 12 o- clock each morning and from 2 un- til 5 o’clock each afternoon. On Friday afternoon the closing meet- ing of the Congress will be held in Sanders Theatre, Memorial Hall, Cambridge. An address entitled “Reminiscences of the Early Days of the Physiological Congresses” will be delivered by Professor Leon Fredericq who is professor Emer- itus at the University of Liege. He has been spending several days at our laboratory with Mrs. Frederiq. At 3:15 o’clock, following these exercises, the International Com- mittee will make its report. In addition to the scientific ses- sions a number of entertainments have been planned, including ex- cursions for the wives of the mem- bers, to nearby points. On Tues- day there will be an excursion to Lexington and Concord, and after a tour of the historic spots tea will be served at the Concord Country Club. Between 4 and 6 o’clock on Wednesday afternoon there will be a Garden Tea at the Longfellow House on Brattle Street in Cam- bridge, and on Wednesday evening at 9 o'clock there will be a recep- tion in the Court of the Harvard Medical School. The Widner Li- brary and the Fogg Museum will be open to members of the Congress on this evening. Following the re- ception Arthur Fiedler will conduct a concert by members of the Boston Symphony Orchestra. On Thursday afternoon, 4 until 6 o'clock, tea will be served for the wives of members of the Congress at the Brookline Country Club. In the evening, at 8 o'clock, a dinner tendered by the Federation of Am- erican Societies for Experimental Biology will be held in Memorial Hall, Cambridge. After the close of the Congress on Friday afternoon a number of trips have been arranged_for the foreign (Continued on Page 4) as- PAGE FOUR THE COLLECTING NET The Collecting Net New Bedford Massachusetts Woods Hole Telephone: Falmouth 1225 A weekly publication concerned with the activities of the Marine Bio- logical Laboratory and of Woods Hole. Ware Cattell Assistant Editors Annaleida S, Cattell Eugene DuBois Contributing Editors Kathryn Hulme Helen S. Morris Mary Coggeshall Alice A. Gooding Theodore Wyman Business Manager Ilse Michaelis Shirley H. Gray—Printer New Bedford, Massachusetts ————————————— The Laboratory Auditorium We learn informally from mem- bers of the Executive Committee that there were several reasons for witholding the use of the labora- tory auditorium from THe CoL-; LECTING Net on August 24. It was made clear that in denying the hall for the showing of “Three Com- rades and one Invention’ for the benefit of THe CoLtLtectinc NET Scholarship Fund the refusal was not based upon the fact that it was a Russian film. This is shown by the fact that they later acted favor- ably upon our petition for permis- sion to use the auditorium for the exhibition of “The Mechanics of the Brain”. One of the primary reasons for their former action, we believe, is that they do not feel that propaganda has a place in a scien- tific laboratory. Each request for the use of the auditorium is acted upon indi- vidually by the Executive Com- mittee. Next year we hope that it will outline the factors taken into consideration by the Committee in reaching its decisions in such a form that they may be printed in THE Cottectinc Net. We are confi- dent that they would interest mem- bers of the laboratory, and be of assistance to the various organiza- tions in Woods Hole in planning their activities for the summer. Tue CoiLectinG Net is an un- official publication concerned with the activities of the Marine’ Bio- LocicAL LagoraTory. Its editor only, therefore, is responsible for its editorial policies. Opinions that have been expressed—or that may | in the future be expressed — are those of its editor, whose only of- ficial connection with the institution is as a research worker in it, and as} a member of the Corporation of the Marine Biological Laboratory. The laboratory is in no way responsible for the make-up of THE CoLvecr- inc Net or for the matter that it contains. ‘ A copy of the next number of Tue CotrectinG Net will be given to each foreign member of the Inter- national Physiological Congress who is in Woods Hole on August 24. For this reason we are holding over the lecture by Dr. Hans Winter- stein together with a review by Dr. Ralph S. Lilhe. This number will also contain the evening lecture which Dr. K. J. Belar will deliver on August 23. In addition we have the pleasure of printing the larger part of the Sedgwick Memorial Lecture which was delivered by Professor Torsten Thunberg on August 16. This last number of THE Cor- LEcTING Net will be further en- larged by two supplements: (1) An elaborately illustrated supplement in honor of the foreign members of the Congress. (2) A list of the serial holdings of the library of the Marine Bio- logical Laboratory consisting of twelve pages. PHYSIOLOGICAL CONGRESS OPENS MONDAY EVENING (Continued from Page 3) members of the Congress. A party will come to Woods Hole in the afternoon to inspect the Marine Bi- ological Laboratory. Two groups of members will make trips to other centers of research, one to Columbia University, stopping at New Haven en route, and the other to Montreal by way of Toronto. On Tuesday evening Surgeon General Hugh S. Cumming of the|j Unied States Public Health Service will give an address of welcome on behalf of the United States Govern- ment. He will be followed by Lieutenant Governor William S. Youngman who will welcome the members of the Congress on behalf of the Commonwealth of Massa- chusetts. President A. Lawrence Lowell will greet the Congress and welcome it to Harvard University. The last of the addresses of welcome will be delivered by the President of this XIIIth International Physio- logical Congress, Professor William H. Howell of Johns Hopkins Uni- versity. An address on “The Progress of Physiology” has been prepared by Professor August Krogh of the University of Copenhagen and will be delivered following the addresses of welcome. Professor Krogh is Director of the Zoophysiological Laboratory. at the University of Copenhagen. He is a Nobel Prize winner for his work on the physi- ology of the capillaries. EMINENT PHYSIOLOGISTS COMING HERE SATURDAY Fully 500 foreign members of the International Physiological Con- gress have expressed their inten- tion of coming to Woods Hole on Saturday. Some of the internation- ally known men who will be among them are: Abderholden, E. G., Halle; Bottazzi, F., Naples; Evans, C. L., London; Fletcher, W., Lon- don; Foa, C., Milano; Gley, E., Paris; Graffe, E.) Wourtzbure’; Hess, W. R., Ziirich; Johansson, J. E., Stockholm; Kato, G., Tokyo; Krogh, A., Copenhagen; Meyer, H. H. H., Vienna; Wolf, T. A., Brus- sels; Samojloff, A. B., Kazan; Sereni, E., Naples. IN AUGUST Late afternoon and lessening light, Tall syice-bush flowers in a row, A white sail slanting on the bay, A thin moon in the afterglow. Spikes are these flowers of sweetest scent, And, resting where the green leaves fold, Clings quietly a butterfly, Soft ruddy and dusty gold. Hour on hour has flitted by, Sarth sunk amid a starry host, Until there seems, amid the grass, A phantom flower, a moth-like ghost. Eleanor Addison. TO A FRIEND Yes, she is lovely as the dusk By early stars half circled round, And having her again, I have What long ago I loved and found. And though we parted years ago, We meet as if a day had passed Since we sat side by side a while, And talked and parted last. There is affinity of souls As chemicals and metals have, And years with these are only hours This side the greedy grave, An intuition swift and clear Delicate instincts of the mind, A subtle knowledge, not of words, That they within each other find. And I believe such friends as these Commune together, glad and wise, And know each other though apart Speaking as if in Paradise. Eleanor Addison. A PORTION OF A LETTER WRITTEN BY AGASSIZ My dear Hattie: I have read over and over again your charming letter, first for the pleasure it gave me and next to find out what I could of your abilities, that I many do something to help you acquire that culture for which you long. I have experience enough as a teacher to be able to tell you at the outset that you may reach any degree of eminence you really care to scale: provided only your are in earnest, and truly industrious. As you can not do every thing at one time, we had better begin at one end and that is nearest home. I am not going to flatter you, but to do the best I know now for your own good. So I must begin by saying that your english is not as good, as it should be and I would ad- vise you to go at once to work to study regularly your mother tongue, which I wish I could write myself better than I do. Ask uncle Charley to lend you his copy of Shakespeare, if you have none of your own; his is a very good edition; and select some play for special study. I would recommend either Hamlet or Romeo anqd Juliet and would advise that you first to read it through, simply to understand the story; then read it a second time mainly to notice the most interesting scenes; then read it a third time to mark the most attractive pas- sages; then read these over and over aloud, taking good care to pronounce correctly every word. When you have done all this, you may then begin the study of the whole play from begin- ning to end, scrutinising every sen- tence and every word so that nothing shall escape your attention and by the time you are through with one solitary play I guarantee you will be a better english scholar than you are now and I shall advise you further. Meanwhile write me as often as you please, in- forming me of your progress. And now good night; give my love to your mother and tell her I was quite disappointed not to have a bet- ter account of her progress and hope the next may be more satisfactory. Give also my love to Dr. Tuttle and his family. Truly your friend, L. AGASSIZ. Headquarters for HUMAN AND ZOOLOGICAL SEALTEHOLTZ TRANSPARENT PREPARATIONS SKELETONS AND SKULLS ANATOMICAL MODELS CEARTS DISSECTING INSTRUMENTS LABORATORY AND STUDENTS SEECIALTIES Please check catalog you wish :— a Spalteholz No. 29 Skeletons, Models, etc. | Charts No. 31 Dissecting Instruments, etc. CLAY-ADAMS CoO. IMPORTERS AND WHOLESALE DISTRIBUTORS 119 EAST 24th STREET NEW YORK CITY | | | faction of ferric chloride. | their THE COLLECTING Liquefaction Tumors Is Topic of Paper NET of Malignant seminar on July 30. ; Dr. Krumbhaar, is printed here. LIQUEFACTION OF MALIGNANT TUMORS AND IRON METABOLISM By Dr. Borts SoKOLOFF Professor of Experimental Biology Russian University of Prague Dr. Sokoloff delivered a paper bearing the above title at the evening The author’s summary, together with a review by Working of Protozoa and studying the question of metabolism of ions, I found some time ago that in very weak doses, adrenaline stimulates the catalytic In fusoria, weak solutions of the latter help to establish the nucleo-cyto- plasmic and accelerate the regenerative process. Stronger applications of iron cause the liquefaction of the cytoplasm. The observed cytologically corroborates the results of Khainsky (1909) on the action on regeneration in- ratio, consequently picture which I Ie was of oxygen on Paramiecium. My experiments show (1) that |the virus of sarcoma (Rous) pro- voked very acute and very profound changes in the suprarenal glands of chickens when the tumor begins to enlarge. All the cortex is filled with fatty incorporations; the weight of the suprarenal gland is 3 or 4 times greater than normal, the spongiocytes lose their normal char- |acteristics, they become vacuolized and deformed, the mitochondria lose organized character, they | become homogeneous with the fatty incorporations and_ these latter |change their chemical structure. Examination of the cortex of the suprarenal gland of the tumor- bearing mice suggests the following conclusion: the Bashford carcinoma influences the cortex much less than the Rous sarcoma. Early in tumor development there is a_ histological change in the zona reticularis. Jus¢ at the border of the medulla appears the zona which is very similar to the zona X observed in the embryo- nal cortex of mice (E. Howard Miller). The pigment fills the cells of the reticularis. In the spongio- cytes the activity of the mitgchon- drial apparatus is observed. The fat starts to fill the cortex when the tumor becomes large in volume. As a rule only a single injection was made into the tumor itself. About one thousand experiments were made. The individual tumors varied from the size of a hazel nut to very large ones of one half the size of the entire rat. When the tumor was very large, it was necessary to repeat the injection. The types of tumors used were aighly malignant, as they proved to be fatal to the control animals in two to three weeks. The most positive results were obtained through the second series of experiments which was perform- ed with Corferrol (extract of total suprarenal gland combined with iron made by Sharit Chemical Co. N. Y.) in the presence of Pyrrol. The total number of experiments is 600. Here I give the resumé of experiments made in February and March, consequently the animals have now been living more than three or four months after cure. Clinical Observations The effect from the injections of Corferrol Py is very rapid. In seven to eight hours after injection, one notices the contraction of the tumor. The tumor turns black, sclerosis takes place, and a few days later this black pigment falls off. The normal tissues are not harmed by the injections. The se- lective action of Corferrol Py to- ward the cancerous tissue can be clearly seen in microphotographs. The boundaries of sclerosis are the same as those of the tumor. Some- times sclerosis occurs faster or slower, depending on the character of the tumor. Fibrous, slow- growing tumors disappear slowly; on the contrary, the active, fast- growing tumors disappear more quickly; very big and degenerated tumors (control animals die in a few days) require repeated injec- tion, and sclerosis takes a longer time, about 15 days. Cytological Observations In a few hours after the injec- tion, in cancerous tissue around the droplets of Corferrol Py, the process of liquefaction is started. The first phenomenon is the decom- position of mitochondria and the weaker staining of the nucleus of the cells, and small vacuoles in the cytoplasm and between the cells. Next the vacuoles enlarge, cancerous cells are transformed into a synciti- um, and tend to be replaced by the vacuoles, which are inclined to moye from the center to the periphery of the tumor. The vacuoles can not be stained by the Best method, or by osmic acid. The Feulgen re- action was also negative. Eventually the whole tumor is filled with these vacuoles. Where the cancer cells are already dead the vacuoles are replaced by kera- tine. The reaction of the tumor a few hours after injection is slightly (Continued on Page 6) PAGE FIVE MICRO MANIPULATOR A precision instrument for the dissection, etc., of micro-organisms. Also injection, for carrying out micro-chemical reactions on a minute scale, studying localized reactions in colloidal mixtures. Price (without microscope) $216.00 Demonstration Ocular ... 54.00 Accessories, chamber, consisting of moist micro-burner, thermo cautery and thermo pipette 32.00 Prices f.0.b. New York CARL ZEISS, INc. 485 Fifth Avenue New York Pacific Coast Branch: 728 South Hill Street, Los Angeles LJENA aE _ PAGE SIX A Manual of the Land and Fresh Water Vertebrate Animals of the United States 184 Illustrations. Map. Cloth $6.60 By Henry Sherring Pratt, Haverford College. “It surely meets one of the greatest needs in the field of zoology. Bibliography. Glossary. The materials included have been collected from various sources quite out the Council on Nature Activities, American Museun Natural History. - of reach of ordinary nature leader'’—Co-ordinating Outlines of the Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates 435 Mlustrations. Cloth $4.00 By J. S. Kingsley, Prof. Zoology, Emeritus, Univ. of Illinois. 3rd Edition. “In its lucid and accurate descriptions and careful classification of materials the book serves as an admirable example of the scientific method'’—Science. P. BLAKISTON’S SON & Co. Inc. PUBLISHERS 1012 WALNUT ST. PHILADELPHIA Section through twe trays showing nesting feature The Wistar Institute Slide Tray carrying 48 one inch slides or 32 one and one half inch slides or 24 two inch slides. Ample space for high mounts, well protected from accident or dust. Trays nest together. Width and breadth the same that they may be nested in either direction. All metal, no paint or varnish to affect slides. See samples at the store room of the Marine Biological Laboratory. They may be purchased for 85 cents each, by sending orders to so _ The Wistar Institute 36th St. and Woodland Ave Philadelphia, Pa. THE COLLECTING NET Tumor Liquefaction (Continued from Page 5) acid. Emulsions of uninjected tumors give pH 6.7 - 7.0; the emulsion of injected tumors gives plat Salles )sk During the first days after in- jections the cortex of the supra- renal gland reacts in its zona reti- cularis. Pigmentation is more in- tense than in ordinary cancer animals. After 3-4 days the return of the normal structure of the cortex can be observed. Gradually the zona X clears. And in rats, where the liquefaction of tumors was complete, I was unable to find any abnormalities of the cortex. Conclusions If we summarize the weight and area of the tumors destroyed in the course of my research, we will have a tumor of 1 sq. meter in diameter and weighing over 50 kilograms. For the liquefaction of such a tumor, only about 5 grams of iron, 0.3 grams of extract of suprarenal gland and 1 gram of Pyrrol Blue were consumed. This to some ex- tent also proves the catalytic selec- tive ability of the action of Corfer- rol Py. We could consider the metals as functioning in biological processes either mobilizers or catalysts, having the power to bring into play the latent energy of cer- tain organic molecules. It is diffi- cult at present to give an exact chemical interpretation of the pro- cess which takes place in tumors due to the action of Corferrol Py. Finally I want to state that though my method is a selective one, and gives unquestionable effect in 100% of the malignant tumors No. 10, No. 39, No. 180, and Flex- ner rat carcinoma, all experiments were of purely laboratory character, and I refrain at present from the discussion of possible application of my method to human cancer. as REVIEW By Dr. E. B. KruMBHAAR, Professor of Pathology, University of Pennsylvania The discovery of Hanan and Moraan in the closing years of the last century that malignant tumors of mammals could be successfully transplanted in animals of the same species, constituted an important step in experimental cancer re- search. It should be of especial interest to us here, as it was dis- covered independently and almost simultaneously by our own Leo Loeb, who was the first to use the procedure as an_ exeprimental method for the study of tumor cell biology. Valuable as the method has proved, however, it is generally admitted to have distinct limitations. The histological picture of the tumor is reproduced, to be sure, and it has the neoplastic quality of unlimited growth, leading to a fatal outcome and sometimes to metas- tases, and has (disputed) ability to | Space. stimulate resistance to tumor growth in the host. Nevertheless, in other ways such transplanted or “homoio- neoplasms” behave differently from spontaneous growths: they often regress and even disappear spon- taneously, which “natural” malig- nant tumors practically never do, and, most important in the present connection, they are much more easily affected by external agents than are the spontaneous neoplasms. They can be more easily extirpated by radium or X-ray; or, being sometimes semi pedunculated, by simple ligation. I have the impres- sion that such transplanted tumors have been destroyed by direct in- jection of necrotizing agents, though I have not been able to verify this point, and most of the experimental chemo-therapy of cancer has been by injection of materials into the general circula- tion. Thus, while in the body of the host, they are not entirely of it, and might be considered in a way as intermediate between cancer cells growing m vitro and a spontaneous cancer. In attempting to apply these general considerations to Dr. Soko- loff’s interesting report, they can at least lead us to be unusually cautious in the acceptance of results based on transplanted tumor behavior and to demand an extra large number and variety of controls. These were not apparent either in the pre- sentation or manuscript, though per- haps they exist and were omitted through exigencies of time and The highly successful re- sults of injection into transplanted tumors immediately excite curiosity as to the probable effect on spon- taneous tumors and though I under- stand a few such tests have been carried out, the evidence is not available. Even a few successful experiments of this kind would carry more weight than the larger number on the transplanted tumors. One would like to know also what the results would be of. the direct injection of other necrotizing sub- stances into the tumors used in these experiments and under the same conditions. As to the under- lying hypothesis, I confess to lack: of experience that would allow me to evaluate it. I had not known for instance, that “adrenalin stimulates the catalytic action of ferric chloride” or in fact that ferric chloride was a catalyst at all...Of course, if Dr. Sokoloff has found a combination of substances which has a marked selective action on cancer cells, it is a matter of high practical importance, even though limited by the necessity of direct in- jection rather than acting through the general circulation. His present communication is so obviously a preliminary one that it is easy to adopt the Asquithian motto of “Wait and See’. Let us hope that his final presentation will be con- trolled beyond reproof. THE COLLECTING NET ’ PAGE SEVEN KEWAUNEE LABORATORY FURNITURE Here are two of our many pieces of Laboratory Technician | : A | Wanted tor the period of one month, Apply to Dr. Edward Laborate F it esi i f Uhlenhuth, 122D, Brick paris | NEG Ae CENEEOG, Tish (a4 ie aie 1; room EAC scientific purposes. No. 15005 is a Pri- Nn pprova 2. vate Laboratory Desk of especial fitness when experiments and tests are fre- quently made. It is very compact and convenient. No. 1005 is a Biology Laboratory Table with cupboards for microscopes and other apparatus or materiuls; drawers for drawings, note, etc. Write for prices. | | Turtox Products | COURSE IN MICROSCOPY for Biology '} Room 1501, Pershing Square are always shipped on approval. Building, New York City Any item ordered from the No. 15005 Evening Classes. Practical lessons General Biological Supply House and demonstrations on the Micro- may be returned for full credit scope and Accessories, including Heunuice Mig. Co: if, for any reason, it does not dark ne!d and the _ polariscope. LABORATORY FURNITURE EXPERTS Sectioning, staining and slide mak- ; | ing. Fees nominal. full purchase price plus any | transportation charges that you | CHARLES P. TITUS have paid. Telephone Walker 2530 C. G. CAMPBELL,' Pres. and Gen. Mgr. 231 Lincoln St., Kewaunee, Wis. Chicago Office: New York Office: 14 E. Jackson Blvd. 70 Fifth Aveune Of'c:s in Principal sities satisfy you. We will refund the NATURAL HISTORY SOME NEW AND CONVENIENT SPECIMENS soa 2e5|| STAINING DISHES ment has recently secured a fine lot of Euplectella and also Ammocoetes, the lar- vae of the lamprey eel, as well as other interesting forms. The Sign of the Turtox Pledges Absolute Satisfaction A large stock of zoological, botani- ,cal_ material and miscroscope slides on sale. General Biological Supply House || Orders solicited now for fall de- | livery. (Incorporated ) | For further information apply at the Supply Department Office. 761-763 East 69 Place Chicago, Illinois 9203. Catalogues on request. re 9188. Staining Dish, McJunkin, designed to hold a single Code slide of paraffine sections and recommended for use in Word the staining, differentiation, dehydration and clearing of sections by the eosin-methylene blue, Giemsa and other methods where each slide requires individual attention. In practice it is customary to move the slides in the dish or remove them to another dish with the help of a straight or curved dissecting needle. Without lid ...... 50 Ohuxi 9189. Standing Dish, for silver staining. Of Glass, 38 mm inside diameter by 20 mm deep. For use in neurohistolo- gical technique as described by Penfield and Cone in Hand Book ot Microscopical Technique, edited by Dr. C. E. McClung New, York, 1192'S) (35 See seme deere ae 15 Ohvac 9201. Staining Dish, Columbia, for Cover Glasses. As de- signed by Prof. R. H. Bowen and used in the Department of Zoology of Columbia University. This dish is built on the principle of the well-known Coplin jar for slides and is particularly convenient for handling cover glasses individually or in groups, in staining, defferentiating, clearing, dehydrating, etc. With cover, and four grooves accommodating from one to eight cover glasses from 3, to 7 inch square. tee, Stain Technology, Vel IV., NO}, (2) spy Beh sy ates Senet Seat ee cee ee mint ies 50 Oibdo e e 10% discount in carton containing one dozen ) On Nos, 9188, S 20% discount in carton containiny one gross ) 9189 and 9201 ectrophotometric Outtit 9203. Staining Dish, New Model, with non-corrosive metal p rack formed by means of automatic tools without the use of soldered joints. Metal rack takes 30 slides 3x1 inch, The Spectrophotometric Outfit consists of three each in individual slot. Complete, with glass dish with major units, each designed to give the highest loosely fitting flat cover which permits stacking .......1.00 Oibor degree of accuracy and efficiency 9206. Ditto. but with metal rack taking 50 slides, either g a abet 3x1, 3x1% or 3x2 inches, each in individual slot. The photometer is of the polarization type, pro- Complete withelass Gish jm. iene aire nets 2 ee eee 1.80 Oibed viding an excellent white light photometer for 9851. Watch Glass (Columbia Culture Dish). as designed photographic use. The spectrometer is of the and used in the Zoology Department of Columbia Univer- sity since 1902 by Prof. G. N. Calkins and students in constant deviation type LENS ie ees olen siolation cultures of protozoa. Made of a single piece in a dustproof housing. The photometric stand of polished plate glass with polished cavity containing permits an excellent fixed source of illumination, about 0.5 ml. The dishes stack securely without evapo- serving both fields of the photometer making ration and are readily adapted for use under dissecting i iati i i lens, binocular or compound microscope. Contents are "4 in 1ty. , ‘ 3 pone ogee ct variations ang tere easily accessible for pipette work ..............--+-+--+ 50 Pehnu 10% discount in carton containing one dozen 20% discount in carton containing one gross = ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY Bau sch & Lomb Optical Co. Retail—Wholesale—Export Write for descriptive literature. LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS 699 St. Paul St. : Rochester, N. Y. WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE ILADELPHIA, U. S. A. Cable Address “Balance’’, agnncenpnta PAGE EIGHT THE COLLECTING NET Tested Purity E&A CHEMICALS Represent the highest quality C. P. Chemicals obtainable. They have been carefully checked in our testing laboratory and bear labels showing the results of their analyses. Many are of American origin, but we draw from the best products of the world, insuring the user the highest purity at a reasonable price. For analytical chemicals, specify E. & A. Pp grade. Write for Pamphlet No. 1165 (CN) EIMER & AMEND Est. 1851 Inc. 1897 Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and Chemical Reagents Third Ave., 18th to 19th St. New York, N. Y. Type B Galvano- meter tivity, short period and negligible self-induction or capacity. It is largely |used for physical and physiological investigation, Several types furnished. TYPE “C” is conspicuous for small size and weight. The string suspension is interchangeable. The Stray field set up by this galvano- meter is extremely small. length 7 em.—weight 10 lbs. SALOMONSON TYPE — This in- strument provides an interchange- able suspension resistance metal strings. It has relatively low current sensitivity and extremely short period. TYPE “A” incorporates the great- obtainable in this galvanometer with propor- tionality of string deflections over | wide range. String length 13 cm.— | weight 200 Ibs. TYPE “B” has a readily inter- ‘~hangeable suspension which makes possible quick replacement of | strings of different characteristics. {String length 7 cm.—weight 45 lbs. its jest | type sensitivity String with two low Full information furnished on request | CAMBRIDGE | Pioneer Manufacturers of Precision Instruments 3512 GRAND CENTRAL TERMINAL, NEW YORK CITY | EINTHOVEN STRING GALVANOMETER This well-known instrument possesses the advantages of extreme sensi- STUDENT MICROSCOPE of NEW DESIGN e The New Leitz Medical Student Microscopes are offered in a size corresponding to Research Instruments. No increase in price prevails! Write for Pamphlet No. 1165 (CN) EEITZ, Ince 60 EAST 10TH STREET NEW YORK, N. Y. Laboratory, Museum and Lecture Room Supplies, Natural History Specimens We Anatomical and Biological Models and Preparations; Natural History Specimens, Skeletons, Skulls; Glass Jars, Microscopes and Accessories, ete. carry a large stock of Scientific Apparatus, Instruments; New Asta Incubators, absolutely Sterilizers and Wassermann Baths, with our reliable patented heat circulating system and heat heating conditions throughout describing these regulating the application. system, insuring uniform chamber. Special circulars apparatus, on We shall be glad to send our New General Catalog and Natural- ’ Supplies Catalog and other literature upon request and furnish any other information that may be desired, VADSCO SALES CORPORATION DIVISION KNY-SCHEERER CORPORATION Dept. of Natural Science, 10-14 West 25th Street, G. Lagai, Ph. D. New York City Volume IV. Number 8 THE ACTIVITIES OF THE CONGRESS AT NEW YORK The foreign members of the Physiological Congress leave Woods Hole by boat for New York on Saturday evening at ten o'clock. The boat will stop at New Haven, and some of them will disembark there to visit the scientific labora- tories of Yale University. A series of excursions of general | | been | | planned for the foreign members| and scientific interest have during their week in New York. Dr. Frederic S. Lee is chairman of the committee in charge of the ar-|| Dr. D. J. Edwards, | rangements. who is secretary of the committee, has devoted a great deal of time to perfecting the plans. The program of the activities of the Congress during their stay in New Haven is reproduced here: (a) Members of the Congress who go direct to New York via the steamer from Woods Hole, will be met at the Pier and taken by buses to the dormitories at Columbia Uni- versity. (b) Members who make the stop at New Haven will travel to New York by train. They will leave the train at the 125th Street Station and proceed from the station platform to the street level where buses will be waiting to convey the party to the Columbia dormitories. PROGRAM Monday, August 26: 10:00 A. M.—Trip to Medical Center of Columbia University. The party will gather in front of the Library on 116th Street where buses will be waiting to transport them to the Medical Center. After a tour of inspection of the labora- tories to the medical school and a visit to the wards and pavilions of the hospital, the party will be enter- tained at luncheon by the Adminis- tration of the Medical Center. 1:30 p. m.—Buses will leave the Medical Center for a sight-seeing trip of the city. The party will return to the dormitories for dinner. Tuesday, August 27: 8:30 a. m—Cold Spring Harbor Trip. Buses will leave from the library, 116th Street, at 8:30 a. m. A stop will be made at Cold Spring Harbor where an opportunity will be given the party to visit The Carnegie Laboratory for Experi- mental Evolution and The Cold Spring Harbor Biological. Labora- tory. 12:30-1 P. M.—The party will be guests of Dr. and Mrs. Graham (Continued on Page 14) WOODS HOLE, MASS., SAT WM. B. L. Calendar Tuesday, August 27, 8:00 P. M. Evening Seminar. Dr. J. Nitzulescu, T. Kerr and G A. Millikan: “Salt Errors for Woods Hole Sea Water.” Dr. Sergius Morgulis: cium in Tetany.” “Blood Cal- | | Dr. S. E. Pond: “Elementary Study | of the Bone Solids with Parti- cular Reterence to Age.” Dr. E. S. G. Barron and Dr. L. B. | Flexner: “The Reduction Poten- tial of Sugars.” Dr. Kenneth Blanchard: (a) “Ine | | organic Constituents of the | Arbacia Egg.” (b) “Antoxida- | tion of Unsaturated Hydrocar- bons.” Friday, August 30, 8:00 P. M. Evening Lecture. To be announced later. URDAY, AUGUST 24, 1929 Subscription $1.25 Single Copies, 20c Sed swick Memorial Lecture Delivered by Dr. Thunberg | THE HYDROGEN-ACTIVATING ENZYMES OF THE CELLS | By Dr. Torsten THUNBERG, Professor of Physiology, University of Lund Dr. Thunberg delivered the William Thompson Sedgwick Memorial | Lecture* bearing the above title in the auditorium of the Marine Biological | Laboratory on the evening of August 16. ing the larger portion of his address, We have the privilege of print- 1. Heinrich Wieland’s new conception of certain oxidation processes. Heinrich Wieland, of Munich, must be considered as the discoverer of the enzyme group called the dehydrogenases, characterized by their power to activate the hydrogen of certain organic substances so that it will be able to cause reactions not occurring in the absence of these enzymes. In 1912 and 1913 Wieland published a new conception of the mechanism of the oxidation of catalytic agents of certain inorganic and Dr. Winterstein Lectures on Process of Excitation THE METABOLISM OF THE PROCESS OF EXCITATION By Dr. Hans WHINTERSTEIN Professor of Physiology and Director of the Physiological Institute, University of Breslau. A lecture delivered at the Marine Biological Laboratory on August 9. I intend to discuss a problem of general physiology, the problem whether the chemical changes pro- duced in a local excitatory process by an artificial stimulation are the same or, whether they differ from the chemical changes of the natural conducting process, which was called by Keith Lucas the “propagated disturbance”. This problem is especially important for the reason, that up to now the artificial stimu- lation of, tor instance, a muscle or a nerve is supposed to be an imita- tion of the natural process, and the chemical changes observable under j these circumstances are believed to be identical with those ordinarily taking place in the organism. The first question to answer is: what is a stimulus and what is excitation? I think the best defini- tion of stimulus is the following one: A stimulus is any more or less sudden change, able to produce a transformation of energy in the living system; and this transforma- tion we call excitation. I do not think that up to now it is possible to give a more precise definition that would hold for all cases. This transformation of energy need not always occur in the place where the stimulus first reaches the living system. For instance the sound waves reach the organism in the external ear and are at first con- ducted by a purely physical process through the tympanum until the organ is reached, where the trans- formation of energy, and therefore the real excitation connected with chemical changes, take place. Now the second question arises: What is the difference between the state of excitation and the state of rest? Are they entirely and funda- mentally different or not? As there exists no real state of rest or static- equilibrium in a living system, it might be possible to regard the differences as purely quantitative and to consider the state of excita- tion simply as an increase of the resting metabolism. This was indeed the conception of many authors, particularly of Verworn, who em- phasized the excitation to be only a catalytical acceleration of the ordi- nary living processes in the state of rest. “Excitation and paralyzation”’, he said, “are nothing but the immediately visible changes in the velocity of the work done by a (Continued on Page 4) organic dysoxidizable substances. According to his theory the oxida- tion 1s due to the activation by the catalyst of the hydrogen of the sub- stances, not, as was thought before, to an activation of oxygen. The simplest example of a cata- lytic oxidation in which we seem to have to assume the activation of hydrogen to be the main factor is the reaction: hydrogen + oxygen = water Pure hydrogen and oxygen do not react with each other with a measureable velocity at lower tem- peratures. But in the presence of spongy platinum or palladium they do. H2e+O2-+ (Pt) =H20, Then the hydrogen peroxide is split up into water and oxygen, this pro- cess being also catalyzed by the platinum : 2H2+O2-+ (Pt) =O2+2H202 Earlier, one believed that this re- action was due to an activation of oxygen under formation of a per- oxide of the metal as an intermedi- ary stage. But now it seems more probable that the hydrogen has been activated,.and that the oxygen mole- cule plays the part of an “acceptor” for the hydrogen activated. That the hydrogen is activated is demonstrated by the fact that oxygen as hydrogen acceptor can be re- placed by other substances, e. g. methylene blue. Methylene blue (Mb) a quinoid dye stuff with no oxygen in the molecule, is reduced to colorless leuco-methylene blue. * Delivered annually “by men of distinguished eminence in some object within the general scope of Biology and Public Health.” (Continued on Page 2) PAGE TWO THE COLLECTING NET of Cells is Subject of Lecture Hydrogen-Activating Enzymes (Continued from Page 1) When you bubble hydrogen through a solution of Mb, no re- duction to leuco-Mb will take place but if you also add some spongy platinum the blue color will soon disappear. The free hydrogen has been activated and reacts with the dye stuff to form leuco-Mb. But also bound hydrogen can be activated in the same way. For a long time it has been known that primary alcohols will be oxidized to aldehydes by oxygen in the presence of spongy platinum. 2CH3CH2OH+O+2-+ ( Pt)= 2CH3CHO-+2 H:20O. Now Wieland has shown, that this transformation of an alcohol to an aldehyde goes on also if Oz is absent, if only another Hy»-acceptor is pres- ent. Consequently the reaction can- not depend on the activation of Op. In the same way an aldehyde can be transformed to the corresponding acid without help of free oxygen if only a suitable hydrogen-acceptor is present. At first glance this seems surprising, because in this case the acid is formed by the introduction of an atom of oxygen into the alde- hyde molecule. CH;.COH+O=CH3.COOH. The explanation is as follows: The aldehyde exists to a greater or less extent as an aldehyde- hydrate CHy, COH+H,0=CHs3.(OH)»2.H If 2 atoms H are removed from this aldehyde-hydrate, we get the acid CH3.(OH)».H-2H=CH;3.COOH. And this removal of 2H is easily done in the absence of Os with the help of a catalyst, provided Mb. is present. Wieland has extended his investi- gations in the field of biology also. As early as 1913 Wieland was able to show that the acetic acid bacteria are able to oxidise alcohol to acetic acid even in the absence of oxygen, if only a suitable hydrogen acceptor, e€. g. Mb. is present. The alcohol is changed into acetic acid and the Mb. is transformed into its leuco-form, which shows that what is called oxidation of the alcohol is in reality a dehydrogenation. Fresh milk will not reduce Mb. and if formaldehyde (or some other aldehyde) is added to milk, it re- mains for a long time change. But when both formalde- hyde and Mb. are added (and espe- cially if oxygen is excluded) the Mb. is reduced to the leuco- compound, while the aldehyde oxidized to formic acid. 30iled milk does not show the reaction, because the enzyme has been -des- troyed. Wieland was able to show that in the case of this reaction, the alde- hyde functions as a “hydrogen do- nator’, if we use the term I later introduced. The hydrogen of the aldehyde or, to be more precise, the hydrogen of the hydrate form of the aldehyde, is activated by the is without | Schardinger enzyme and this acti- vated hydrogen reacts with the Mb. which is transformed to leuco-Mb By giving off this hydrogen the al- dehy de- hydrate simultaneously transformed to the corresponding acid. is THe APPLICATION OF THE IDEAS OF WIELAND TO THE PROB- LEM. OF THE OXIDATION OF THE “METABOLITES” OF HIGHER OR- GaNnisms. The “Succino-dehydro- genase.” f The importance of Wieland’s ideas for the understanding of the intracellular oxidation processes of higher organisms was shown by the discovery of other dehydrogenases able to activate substances, which undoubtedly had a place in the meta- bolism of the higher organisms, e. g. succinic acid, malic acid, citric acid, lactic acid, and glutamic acid. During the course of investiga- tions concerning the respiration of the isolated muscle in its dependence on various factors, I found in 1909, by use of my microrespirometer, that the oxygen consumption of the muscle substance was increased by the neutral alkali salts of some or- ganic acid, amongst others those of succinic acid. On the basis of this observation Battelli and Stern showed that the increase of oxygen consumption, which is caused by succinic acid, corresponds to one atom of oxygen per molecule of succinic acid. The next step was the discovery by Ein- beck that succinic acid is oxidized by muscle substance to fumaric acid. The reaction mixture shows also a content of malic acid, which is formed from fumaric acid under the influence of a hydrolytic en- zyme. The investigations of Dakin have thrown further light on the nature of this reaction and have shown that the malic acid which is formed from fumaric acid, is the laevo-form, Succinic acid, fumaric acid and malic acid are now known as regular constituents of the muscle juice. The observation that succinic acid is very easily oxidised into fumaric acid under the influence of animal tissues was bound to cause sur- prise, because succinic acid is known to be very resistant against oxidative agents e. g. nitric acid. In reality succinic acid is an end product of the oxidative action on fatty acid by strong oxidative reagents. How was it then possible for the organ- ism to oxidize these compounds ? Studying this problem I came a- cross Wieland’s publications and it seemed to me that his theory gave a possible understanding of the re- action. Perhaps here was a cata- .| lytical dehyrogenation ? In order to verify this hypothesis I made the following experiment. In each of two tubes, which could be evacuated, I placed equal quan- tities of muscle substance and of Mb. In one of the tubes I further placed some succinic acid in the form of its neutral potassium salt. o g. The tubes were then evacuated and placed in a thermostat at 35° The two tubes behaved quite dif- ferently. The tube which did not contain succinic acid showed no change in its color, while the mix- ture in the other tube soon had been wholly decolorized. Since the Mb.-decoloration re- quires the presence of activated hy- drogen this result fully proved that succinic acid under the influence of the enzymes of the muscle tissues is activated in regard to its hydro- gen. The only reaction product which can very well be imagined to occur under these circumstances is fumaric acid. Having found that the oxidation of such a substance as succinic acid by animal tissues is begun by an ac- tivation of its hydrogen, I went on to investigate whether a_ similar mechanism played a part in the oxidation of a certain number of other substances, and to what ex- tent, and how the hydrogen-activa- ting power of the cells and their enzymes was influenced by various factors. The field of investigations planned was wide and in order to make it possible to cover it in the available time | first elaborated a convenient and handy method. The method is now used in many other laboratories than my own. I think it was the Cambridge School which gave it the name “The Thunberg Technique.” 3. THE “THUNBERG TECH- NIQUE.” The most important constituents of the Thunberg technique are the vacuum test tubes. “Thunberg- tubes” serve while keeping out ox- ygen, to contain the reaction mix- ture in which the hydrogen activa- tion is going on, and in which also an indicator for activated hydrogen is present. Keeping out the oxygen necessary for two reasons. If oxygen is present it may work as a hydrogen acceptor. The active hy- drogen divides then between the ox- ygen and the indicator according to unknown laws, the reaction veloci- ties and the affinities being sthe de- ciding factors. Other factors are the concentration of the two ac- ceptors, which vary during the course of the experiment. By keep- ing the oxygen absent the undesir- able accessory reaction with this substance is eliminated. The total quantity of hydrogen formed during the reaction in that way is taken over by the indicator and kept by it. Only when the experiment is car- ried out in the absence of oxygen is it practicable to use as indicators substances such as methylene blue, the reduction forms of which are cues by oxygen. Thunberg tube is a glass tube is Games 10 Iding about 10 cubic centi- metres, one end of which is closed, while the other is open. The open end can be closed by means of a stopper of conical form and fitting very close. A hole in the stopper can be made to communicate with a side-tube closed by turning the stopper. This side-tube can be put into communication with a vacuum pump by a rubber-tube. Generally a great series of tubes, e. g. 20, is used at the same time. After the evacuation the vacuum tubes are placed in a thermostat. One side of this thermostat is made of glass so that it is possible to ob- serve the vacuum tubes. As indicator on the activated hy- drogen, different substances can be used. Methylene blue has been used more extensively than any other. Generally the time for complete de- coloration of the tubes is studied. A point of interest is the question of what changes take place in the Mb. molecule when under the in- fluence of a reducing agent it is changed to its leuco-form. General- ly this reaction is expressed in the simple way : Mb+H.2=} This equation is permissible for some practical purposes but is open to the objection that it will easily cause misunderstandings. It must not be taken to mean that the ring structure remains un- changed when Mb. is reduced. As a matter of fact the quinoid binding with its two double bonds is changed to a benzoid binding. Since the dye character depended on the quinoid binding it is obvious that in this way the substance must be decolorized. The equation given above seems to express the introduction of two hydrogen atoms in the Mb. mole- cule. This needs to be explained. When speaking of Mb. experi- ments we mean in reality experi- ments with some Mb. salt, usually the Mb. chloride. The more simple formula given above will then ap- pear in the following form: Mb. Cl+Hs=MbH;Cl It may be objected that although the constitution of the Mb. mole- cule allows the formation of a chlor- ide this is not the case with the leuco-Mb molecule. But it may, on the other hand, possibly give rise to a hydrochloride. This hydrochloride of leuco-Mb. will however, rapidly and to a great extent dissociate, giv- ing off hydrochloric acid with change of the 5-valent nitrogen to 3-valent. Thus, if Mb. is reduced —for which reduction two atoms of hydrogen are necessary—we obtain one molecule Mb.H and in addi- tion one molecule free hydrochlor- ic acid. Notwithstanding the dif- ferent final fates of the two H- atoms in question, we may very well use the short formula given above, since we are entitled to assume that the leuco-Mb.-HC1 appears at least as a transitory product. 4. THe GENERAL DEHYDRO- GENASE-SYSTEM OF THE ANIMAL TISSUE. With this method I began in 1917 a series of investigations of the de- hydrogenases of animal tissues. During my experiments with my (Continued on Page 3) THE COLLECTING NET Hydrogen-Activating Enzymes (Continued from Page 2) micro-respirometer I had found that the oxygen consumption of the sur- viving, perfectly fresh frog muscle substance was strongly increased under the influence of malic acid, fumaric acid, and citric acid. I now began to investigate whether or not the hydrogen of these substances is activated when they are added to muscle substance in vacuum. Such fresh muscle substance pos- sesses a strong decoloration power already independent of every extra addition of donator substance, which decoloration obviously must be due to donator substances already pres- ent in the system. This “spontane- ous” decoloration often makes it difficult to observe a possible de- coloration effect caused by the ad- dition of other donator substances. In order to avoid this difficulty I extracted the fresh muscle substance with water or some suitable salt so- lution and thus, by depriving it of at least the great part of its pre-ex- isting donators, brought the spon- taneous decoloration down to a min- imum of importance. I then used this extracted muscle substance for the investigation of the substances mentioned above and of a great number of other substances The results of these experiments showed that the before-mentioned three substances: malic acid, fu- maric acid, and citric acid, possess a strong power to cause the decolora- tion of Mb. in vacuum, if they are influenced by muscle substance. But also a great number of other sub- stances, acids and amino acids have their more or less specific dehydro- genases and are able to act as hydro- gen-donators. It is clear also in the case of these substances that their oxidation by the tissues is begun by the activa- tion of their hydrogen. With the help of the Mb. tech- nique described above also other tissues than muscle were investi- gated in my laboratory. The result was that all tissues contain dehy- drogenases. Dehydrogenases are also found in such tissues as the white nerve-substance and the lens system. 5. GENERAL VIEW OF THE FINAL Fate OF THE CONSUMED OXYGEN AND OF THE ORIGIN OF THE Oxy- GEN IN THE EXPIRED CARBON DIOXIDE. Two questions of interest here are (1) what is the ultimate fate of the free oxygen which we breathe, i. e. which are its final products? And (2) what is the origin of the oxygen forming part of the carbon dioxide which we give off? According to current physiologi- cal views the answer to these queries is as follows: The most important final product of the consumed free oxygen is COy. Only a small part of the oxygen takes the form of water. According to my opinion we have to change fundamentally our views on these things. I consider that none of the oxygen consumed in the gen- eral metabolism is found in the ex- pired COs. My view on the catabolism of food stuffs is that this process takes place in a series of continuous de- hydrogenations combined with two other processes, viz. addition of water and the splitting off of carbon dioxide. Through the addition of water the intermediate product of catabolism receives two atoms of hydrogen and one atom of oxygen. When the water has been added a new dehydrogenation process takes place and two atoms of hydrogen are split off once more. Thus the result is a product which, in com- parison with the original substance, is richer in carbon and poorer in hydrogen and which also shows a change in the proportions between carbon and oxygen in favor of the latter element. Through the split- ting off of the carbon dioxide the chain of carbon atoms is shortened step by step. According to this view of inter- mediate metabolism the food stuffs take part in it on account of their actual or potential content of hy- drogen. The hydrogen is the real combustion stuff of the cells. The carbon of this carbon chain has the same function with regard to the hydrogen as a string for the pear's upon “it. Although the carbon is never directly oxidised in metabol- ism its caloric content and its en- ergy is made available through ad- dition of water and the splitting off of hydrogen and its oxidation. For the total fund of energy it is of no importance in what way the oxida- tion is carried out. Returning to the question referred to above concerning the final pro- ducts of the oxygen and the origin of the oxygen found in the expired carbonic acid the answer in regard to the fate of the oxygen is that the oxygen is used for the oxidation of the hydrogen, which is activated by the dehydrogenases and given over to the oxygen in activated form. The oxygen consumed during the respiration is transformed to water. Hydroperoxide must be the first, or at least the most important, pro- duct of this reaction between hy- drogen and oxygen. It is the most natural combination product of hy- drogen and oxygen in the form available here. However, the form- ation of hydroperoxide means that the oxygen is half used. This being so, the function of the catalase is easily understood. Through the ac- tion of this hydrogenperoxide-split- ting enzyme half cf the oxygen of the hydrogen peroxide is liberated and can thus function as hydrogen acceptor once more. Thus the cata- lase is an enzyme which renders pos- sible a more economical use of the oxygen. This theory—which does not exclude other explanations— harmonizes with the small content of catalase in such organisms which are adapted to life without oxygen. PAGE THREE of Cells is Subject of Lecture The oxygen in the expired car- bondioxide does not originate from the oxygen in the ane but comes from other sources. Part of it comes from the oxygen which is originally a content of the molecules of the food stuffs and which remains in its combination with the carbon atoms of the carbonic chain when the hydrogen atoms are split off by the dehydrogenases. Another part of the oxygen in the expired COs is due to the water molecules added to the carbonic chain, particularly in those places where double bonds are formed by dehydrogenations as well as by the change of the aldehyde groups to aldehyde-hydrates. It is of course, quite possible that the water thus added comes from the water formed by the reaction be- tween the oxygen of the atmosphere and the hydrogen of the food stuffs. But the water formed in this way is so small a fraction of the total water content of the organism that it is of no account. In this connection I should like to say a few words about the usual re- action formula for the oxidation of a carbohydrate, e. g. glucose. CgHi20¢6-+-6C 6COs+6HsO Naturally this formula is correct if it claims to show only the new products found in a reaction mix- ture where glucose is combusted and to show the stoechiometric relations between the substances in the form- ula. But if we want the reaction formula to give the genetic relation between the atoms on both sides of the equality mark in the equation, then the equation is unsatisfactory. It does not express the biological oxidation of the glucose such as I have interpreted it. The formula can be criticized from the genetical point of view on the account that six of the twelve atoms of oxygen which! are denoted as forming part of the carbonic acid on the right side of the mark of equality do not come from the glucose but from a sub- stance--water--which is not denoted in the formula. Consequently the formula is not to be looked upon as the result of abbreviation due to the leaving out of intermediate links— which, of course, is allowed,—but is incorrect, in that it suggests a gen- etic relation which does not exist. 6. XANTHIN DEHYDROGENASE. To Sir F. G. Hopkins and collab- orators in Cambridge is due the merit of discovering that the field of action of the dehydrogenases em- braces also a class of substances of quite a different sort than those treated above. In 1922 Hopkins, Morgan and Stewart published the observation that the enzyme roughly character- ized for the first time in 1905 by Burian and called by him xanthin oxidase belongs in reality to the de- hydrogenases. The biological substrates of this enzyme are xanthin and hypoxan- thin. These substances seem to ex- ist, at least to a certain extent, in their hydrate forms. The xanthin- dehydrogenase transforms them to uric acid by depriving them of cer- tain hydrogen atoms. 7. THe DrnHypDROGENASES BACTERIA. As pointed out in the introduc- tion to this lecture the oxidation of alcohol to acetic acid by the acetic bacteria was one of the biological reactions on which Wieland founded his theory of biological dehydro- genation. But since then our knowledge of the bacteriological de- hydrogenation processes has made great progress. That is due to the work of Quastel and his col- laborators, Stephenson, Whetham, Wolf and Woolridge, working in Sir F. G. Hopkins’ Institute in Cambridge. Quastel used the bacteria under such conditions that their growth during the experimental time was OF small or non-existant. In other words he used “non-proliferating” bacteria. The conditions that growth shall be small or absent during the ex- perimental time are easily secured if experiments are carried out as follows (1) In the absence of some fac- tor essential for growth, e. g. a nu- tritive source of nitrogen in the cul- ture. (2) Anaerobically. (3) Ina short time—usually un- der thirty minutes. (4) At a relatively high temper- ature (i. e. a temperature at which growth is known either to be in- hibited or not to occur, but which does not seriously interfere with the reaction under investigation. ) Among the results arrived at by Quastel ‘and his collaborators dur- ing the course of their experiments on Bacillus coli may here be men- tioned their discovery of a great number of organic substances ac- tivated by B. coli. Using the Mb. technique Quastel found that 56 substances could be activated, al- though these substances otherwise are quite inert, apart from the in- fluence of living cells. 8. THE DEHYDROGENASES SEEDS. A great number of seeds contain stores of dehydrogenases. In cer- tain seeds they occur in such form that these seeds are the best material for the detection of dehydrogenases and for the study of their qualities. Experience has shown that cer- tain substances will act as do- nators more often than others. Thus formic acid, malic acid, glutamic acid, hexosediphosphoric acid, and ethyl alcohol are active on a great number of seeds, but the degree of their activating power varies. Malic acid may be in one case more active than, e. g., alcohol, but in the case of another seed the conditions may be reversed. It is a rather remarkable fact that I have found no trace of activating (Continued on Page 4) IN PAGE FOUR THE COLLECTING NET Hydrogen-Activating Enzymes of Cells is Subject of Lecture (Continued from Page 3) power on seeds in the case of suc- cinic acid, which is such a strong activator where animal tissues are concerned. The results mentioned above are most easily interpreted from a plu- ralistic view of the dehydrogenases. Probably seeds possess a series of dehydrogenases, each with a limited field of action. Different seeds may possess the same or different de- hydrogenases. 9. THe DEHYDROGENASES POLLEN. In order to understand the func- tion of the dehydrogenases it is necessary to investigate as many types of cells as possible : above all, no cell type with a distinctly specific function must be left out of con- sideration. I have therefore included in my investigation also the sex cells. Un- til now I have had time to investi- gate only the pollen of hazel (Cory- Jus avelana). It was easy to show the existence of dehydrogenases in these cells. The dehydrogenases found were able to activate malic acid, glycerophosphoric acid, and certain alcohols, especially ethyl al- cohol, propyl alcohol and normal butyl alcohol. 10. Some FurrHerR Worps ApouT THE SPECIFICITY OF THE DEHYDROGENASES. A good evidence for the specificity of the succino—dehydrogenase 1s the fact that the lens substance of the eye activates lactic acid, malic acid, citric acid, and glycerinphos- phoric acid, but has no power to ac- tivate succinic acid, as shown by Ahlgren. The investigations from the lab- oratory of Sir F. G. Hopkins also point to a high specificity of the xanthindehydrogenase. And_ this same laboratory has lately furnished further proofs for the truth of the theory of the high specificity of the dehydrogenases. Thus Miss Mar- jory Stephenson has succeeded in obtaining from Bacillus coli a spe- cific soluble lacticodehydrogenase. Further, Bernheim has been able to extract a soluble citricodehydrogen- ase, free from other tissue-dehydro- genases. Bernheim has also been able to obtain a lacticodehydrogenase in soJ- uble form and free from other de- hydrogenases by extracting aceton- dry yeast with phosphate solution for a short period. 11. Tue Bewsavior Towarps OxyGEN OF THE HyproceN Ac- TIVATED BY THE DEHYDROGENASES. Keilin has found that cells of aerobic organisms contain a respira- tory pigment, cytochrome, and also} a real oxidase, which he calls the indophenol oxidase. These two’ sub-} stances collaborate in the following way. The indophenol oxidase is able to transfer oxygen to the cyto- chrome and thus to change it to its oxidised form, and could conse- quently perhaps better be called the cytochrome-oxidase. It is this oxi- OF [oxygen of the atmosphere. dized cytochrome which in its turn has the power of reacting with the hydrogen activated by the dehydro- genases. The cytochrome-oxidase seems difficult to extract and bring into the form of a solution. In the still intact cells and tissues the de- hydrogenases collaborate with this system and are thus able to use the Solu- tions of dehydrogenases, on the other hand, lack the cytochrome system and it is uncertain whether or not they are able to use the oxygen. Keilin has shown that the cyto- chrome-oxidase is made inactive by the KCN, while this substance does not affect the dehydrogenases. Thus the difference between the action of KCN on the O-oxidation and on the Mb.-oxidation, which, as I found in 1916, is not influenced by KCN is explained in a very interesting way. 12. FurrHER FUNCTIONS OF THE DEHYDROGENASES. In describing the dehydrogenases Wieland realized that a series of different effects must be ascribed to this new group of enzymes. In transporting ‘hydrogen from the do- nator substance to the acceptor sub- stance the dehydrogenase acts both as an oxidase and a reductase. When I first began my investiga- tion in this field I suggested that this enzyme group may be able to carry out also synthesis of short carbon chains to longer ones. Hav- ing observed the enzymatic dehy- drogenation of acetic acid and hav- ing found it difficult to explain in any other way I formed the hypo- thesis that two molecules of acetic acid giving off two hydrogen atoms are linked together to one molecule | ” of succinic acid. It has been pos-}. sible to bring about this synthesis in model experiments in vitro with- out the help of enzymes and also certain bacteria are able to perform it. When succinic acid is being trans- formed, to fumaric acid under the influence of the succinodehydrogen- ase there takes place at the same time and under the influence of the same enzyme a transformation of fumaric acid to succinic acid. The quantitative relation between the two contrary processes depends on the relative amounts of the two sub- stances. That is to say: the succino-de- hydrogenase is at the same time a fumarico-hydrogenase. 13. Tur Use or tHE Mb. TEcH- NIQUE IN QUALITATIVE AND QUAN- TITATIVE ANALYSIS. It is clear from what has been said above that the reduction of Mb. ‘in vacuum requires the presence of a donator substance as well as of the corresponding specific enzyme. The Mb. reduction does not take place when one or the other of these fac- tors is lacking. Mb. + succinic acid gives no reduction, nor Mb. + succi- nodehydrogenase. If, on the other hand, the system is made complete | resting state. so that all the three substances Mb., succinodehydrogenase, and succinic acid, are present, then reduction is certain. This fact enables us to use the enzymatic decoloration in question | in the service of biochemical analy-| sis. About a year ago I succeeded in finding an Mb.-dehydrogenase sys- tem which seems to make possible | the determination of citric acid in animal tissues and fluids in very small amounts not detectable with other technical methods. The technique is based on the presence in cucumber seeds of a dehydrogenase with the power to activate citric acid. Only seeds with weak spontaneous reduction or those jlacking it entirely can be used for the method. By making use of this relation of cucumber seed extract to citric acid it has been possible to create a quantitative method for the deter- mination of citric acid in animal fluids. A fact of special import- ance for this method is that we are able to decide accurately the mini- mal quantity of citric acid required for the maximal velocity of the de- coloration process. If we go below this minimal quantity the decolor- ation velocity decreases very rapid- ly. The method is the more con- venient and easy since it is unneces- sary to extract and isolate the citric acid from the animal fluids. A method must be valued ac- cording to the results achieved. What new discoveries have then been made by means of the method | just described ? I give here a table citric acid content of some animal |fluids. All values are expressed in ;parts per thousand (“per mille’). Citric Acid Content 0.25 - 1.8 showing the Animal Fluid URINE Investigator, Cstberg. Citrie acid is never absent in urine from healthy people. It may go down to zero in nephritis. Women's milk contains no citric acid before two days after delivery. The citric acid content then going up rapidly to Investigator, Jerlov. Cerebrospinal fluid Investigator, Benni. Fluid from epididymis rabbit Investigator, Schersten. Fluid from seminal vesicles of rabbit Investigator, Schersten. Fluid from seminal vesicles of pig Investigator, Sperm of man Investigator, Sweat Investigator, 1.5 0.05 - 0.06 of 2.05 1.5 6 Schersten. 1.8 - 4.1 Schersten. about 0.1 Schersten. Less than Blood serum of man determinable Investigator, Ostberg. Dr. Winterstein Lectures on Process of Excitation (Continued from Page 1) system”. But what is this directly visible change in velocity and w hat is the work done by a resting muscle or nerve? The only fact of observation in favor of Verworn’s theory is that all excitatory processes of any organ investigated up to now seem to be accompanied by an increase of many chemical processes of the The working muscle, the excited nervous system, the secreting gland, the retina exposed to light, all show an increased in- take of oxygen and sugar. They also give off more carbon dioxide, and .sometimes more lactic acid, phosphoric acid, ammonia, heat, etc. It may be considered as prob- able that the increased amounts of substances taken up in the state of excitation are used for the same chemical processes and that the sub- stances and the heat additionally formed originate from the same chemical reactions as in the resting metabolism. But we must confess, that it has not at all been proven and that at least it can be doubted, that the chemical processes taking place in the contracting muscle or in-the excited nerve are really nothing else than an acceleration of the same processes in the state of rest. In no case would it be per- missable to identify the state of excitation simply with a state of increased metabolism, as Verworn is inclined to do. This is proven by many experiments : through warm- ing, for example, we can increase the resting metabolism of a whole organism or of a single organ by several hundred percent, without causing an excitation. The same is the case with chemical influences. Long ago I carried out many experi- ments with my collaborators which show this in a very instructive way. The object used was the isolated spinal cord of the frog. Since in my lecture I will have to refer frequently to this material, on which most of the experiments on the metabolism of the nervous system in our laboratory were performed, it may be useful to say a few words about it. It is quite easy to take the spinal cord out of the spine, if needed, together with the brain, without damaging its vitality. If one leaves the spinal cord attached to the sciatic nerve, the shank and the foot of the frog can be used as an index of the survival of the nervous centers and the degree of their reflex-excitability. It is, I daresay, a simplified frog, reduced exclusively to those parts of organs that are needed for the reflex mechanism. For demonstrating it in lectures I use a very simple arrangement: On the bottom of an (Continued on Page 5) THE COLLECTING NET Dr. Winterstein Presents His Views on the Process (Continued from Page 4) inverted beaker a small hook is fixed, to which the anterior end of the spinal cord is fastened with a thread. The sciatic nerve passes through the spout of the beaker to the leg lying in a shallow Petri dish filled with Ringer solution. By this arrangement the reflex activity per- sists in a very satisfactory manner. In an atmosphere of pure oxygen or in a salt solution through which oxygen is continuously bubbled, the preparation can keep its vitality for one or even two days, when the temperature is kept low. It is of course very suitable for compara- tive studies of reflex excitability and the chemical changes of the central nervous system under var- ious conditions. The investigation of the in- fluences effected by chemical fac- tors showed us that neither the alteration of the excitability nor the size of the observable excitatory processes are accompanied by equivalent changes in the intensity of the metabolism. The enormous increase of excitability caused by poisoning the spinal cord of the frog with strychnine is mot accom~ panied by the least increase of the consumption of oxygen or of the formation of carbon dioxide or lactic acid, as long as no stimula- tion takes place. The same is true for the paralysing influences. In distilled water the oxygen intake of the isolated spinal cord stays abso- lutely unchanged, though the reflex excitability disappears gradually, and in hypertonic solutions an even more remarkable increase of oxygen consumption is observed, although in this case also the excitability has been completely lost. A narcosis by alcohol which completely sus- pends the excitability also causes a remarkable increase of oxygen con- sumption. Since the metabolism is the only directly observable work done by the resting as well as by the excited organ, the excitation is in no way identical with this increase, nor is the paralysis identical with a decrease of the work done by the resting organ. Neither the absolute nor the relative intensity of the metabolism of an organ enables us to decide whether it is in the state of rest or of excitation or of paralysis. If excitation is accompanied by an increased metabolism, the latter is probably the consequence of the former but not identical with it. Up to now we can only deduce the presence of an excitation from the reactions produced by it or from the electric phenomena, the action currents, accompanying it; that is from a work not observable at all in the resting organ. Let us now consider which rela- tions exist between the local excita- tory processes and those accompany- ing the conduction of excitation waves. That is a problem which has been mostly discussed under | gradually the title “excitability and conducti- bility”. If the processes of excita- tion caused by stimulation are con- sidered to be only an acceleration of the chemical reactions in resting metabolism, then the transforma- tions of energy going on in the stimulated place and those of the propagated disturbance must of course also be identical. Indeed Verworn regarded the identity of these two processes as evident. The experimental treatment of this problem has mostly been under- taken with the following arrange- ment: A certain length of a nerve is exposed to an alteration (narco- sis, asphixia, cold). An arti ficial, mostly electrical, stimulus is applied, once within the affected part, the other time so that the excitation waves produced in the normal tissue must traverse the altered portion, in order to reach the endorgan (muscle or central nervous system). In the first case the changes of “excitability” at the stimulated place, in the second those of ‘“conductibility’” are to be examined. Curiously enough many investigators have not taken into consideration the fact that it is abso- lutely impossible to make an isolated examination of the local excitatory process in this way. For however near to the normal tissue one puts the place of stimulation in the al- tered part of nerve, the excitation wave must always traverse the altered part for a short distance in order to reach the endorgan and |must therefore also be under the influence of a change of conducti- bility. It is very important to keep this fact in mind. I cannot discuss the numerous publications about these experi- ments. I will only mention only what is most important for our purpose. When the intensity of the alteration : increases (the narcosis deepens, the asphyxia progresses, ) the “conductibility’ | examined outside cf the affected part of the nerve remains at first un- changed and then suddenly disap- pears. On the other hand the “excitability” examined within the affected region of the nerve shows a continual and quite regular de- crease, that is to say, the strength of the stimulus necessary to produce a result must be increased. As the conductibility for the excitation waves produced in the normal part remains at first unchanged, the decrease of excitability can depend only on changes in the processes developing in the excited place itself. We therefore find here for the first time apparently, at least, a separation of these two processes. Until a short time ago it was believed and considered to have been proven by a large number of experiments, that the injured part of the nerve con- ducts with a decrement. That is to say, that the excitation waves gradually become weaker the longer the affected part is that they have traversed. According to this sup- position the excitation waves start- ing in the normal part would fail to reach the endorgan, while the stimulation of the affected part would still produce an_ effect, because here the waves suffer a smaller decrement, having to travel a shorter path. Apparently the so- called “excitability” is preserved when the “conductibility’” is lost. The fundamental experiments of Kato and his co-workers have shown that all these results were due to experimental errors, namely to the spreading of the electrical current to the normal part of the nerve. In reality the excitation waves in the injured part show no decrement ; they are of a smaller but always the same intensity. When the stimulation outside of this part has no effect, it will also have no effect within the altered part. Kato concluded that excitability and conductibility of the nerve are suspended at the same time, that is to say, the processes taking place in the stimulated part and the processes of conduction cease simultaneously. This conclusion, however is not proved because in the experimental arrangement used, the effect of the stimulation is judged by the reaction of an organ distant from the stimulated place; therefore, as mentioned above there is no possibility at all of saying any- thing about the processes taking place, if they do not reach the en- dorgan. That they can exist even when the conductibility has disap- peared, results with great probability from experiments of Koch. Koch derived the electrical current from the cross section and the surface of a nerve in the narcosis chamber and found that the electrical potential decreases gradually with deepening of the narcosis, even at a time when every stimulation has become non- etfective. From this further decrease of the demarcation current Koch rightly deduces that the processes involving the “excitability” still go on, when the conductibility is al- ready suspended. In accordance with the usual theory that con- duction depends on the stimulation of one part by the excitation of the neighbouring part, Koch explains his experiments as follows: At a certain degree of alteration of the nerve, the excitation of the stimu- lated place becomes subnormal ; that is, remains under the threshold necessary to excite the neighbouring part, and therefore the excitation cannot be conducted. The same idea that local excita- tory processes, which are too weak to spread and to bring about a con- traction can still exist, has long ago been expressed for the muscle, especially on account of the observa- tion that chemical stimuli influencing the muscle in its whole extent can still produce a contraction, while the excitability has disappeared for electrical or mechanical stimulations acting only locally. PAGE FIVE of Excitation Finally it may also be mentioned that the phenomena of fatigue which have been observed on non- medullated nerves show a distinct difference between the local excita- tory processes and the propagated ones. As Levin observed in the leg nerve of Maja squinado the fatigue is easy to produce through repeated stimulation and this fatigue is limited almost exclusively to the stimulated place, since the stimula- tion of another part continues to produce effects only slightly lessen- ed in intensity. Hence the conduc- tion has been influenced to only a small degree. There are, as we have seen, a good many observations showing that under certain circumstances it is possible to separate the local excita- tory processes from the processes of conduction. This separation however seems to be compatible with the conception that we are dealing here with processes of the same kind, differing only quantita- tively. But this is only a hypothesis, and the different behaviour of the two processes could also arise from qualitative ditferences. As by the method thus far in use the effect of the stimulation is judged by the observation of an end-organ re- moved from the stimulated place, nothing is revealed about the chemi- cal changes involved and no clear decision is to be obtained. Therefore I tried quite another way, which I found in the following manner: The direct electrical stim- ulation of the isolated nervous system of the frog produces a very large increase of the gas exchange, about 50-300%, as found by many investigations. In contrast to this Parker observed in _ his experiments on the nerve of the dogfish only an increase of about 14%. All other authors investigated the oxygen intake or the COz output in the same space in which the stimulated part of nerve was kept, while Parker used a method in which the stimulation was applied on a part of the nerve kept outside the respiration chamber. In this way Parker was really the first who measured the gas exchange pro- duced by the propagated disturbance. This made me suspect that the dif- ferences between the results of Parker and those of the others were caused by a difference between the metabolism of the local excitatory process and that of the propagated excitation waves. This induced me to pursue the question further. In numerous papers from our laboratory we have described the influence of direct stimulation on the various metabolic processes of the isolated nervous system of the frog. The most important results may be briefly summarized as follows: The oxygen intake and the CO, output show, as mentioned above, a strong increase. If sugar is added to the solution, in which the isolated spinal cord is kept, a (Continued on Page 6) PAGE SIX PR GE SS Dr. Winterstein Presents His Views on the (Continued from Page 5) part of the sugar suffers a trans- formation. This transformation iS also greatly increased by stimula- tion, especially with glucose, much less with fructose and galactose, though in the resting metabolism the latter is consumed in great- est amount. In contrast to this increase of sugar consumption the amount of carbohydrates stored in the centers show, in case of stimula- tion, Iess diminution than in the resting ones and, when sugar and insulin are simultaneously added to the solution, the stock of glycogen and of cerebrosides stored may even rise to a considerable degree. Also the production of lactic acid decreases by stimulation. On the other hand the stimulation produces a large increase in the consumption of nitrogen containing materials, principally of the ones which are titratable by formol (amino-nitro- gen) and of nitrogen of unknown origin. In the peripheral nerve the production of ammonia, first found by Tashiro, is extraordinarily increased by stimulation, but— strange to say—not influenced at all in the central nervous system. Kept in a gaseous medium the latter does not show any ammonia production at all. The consumption of fat-like and of phosphorus- containing material is greatly in- creased in the stimulated centres. Except for the ammonia production just mentioned the peripheral ner- vous system behaves as far as investigated in every other respect in the same manner as the central! one. Many investigations led the ma- jority of authors to the conviction that the so called all-or-none-law 1s not only applicable to the heart- muscle as was formerly believed, but also to all muscle and nerve fibres. It means that every stimu- lus. if it- has any effect at all, produces the strongest excitation possible; therefore the excitation waves (however their intensity may vary under different condi- tions) have under the same circum- stances always the same size which) shocks. is independent of the intensity of the stimulus. Together with one of my students I investigated the problem of how the metabolism of different isolated organs of the frog behaves under the influence of electrical stimuli of different strength, and I was surprised to the all-or-none-principle only in the case of the heart, whereas striped and smooth muscles. peripheral nerves and central nervous system showed a gradually rising oxygen' consumption in correspondence with the increase of the strength of the stimulus. Therefore the metabolism of the local excitatory process does not obey the all-or-none-law. What about the conduction process? |pagated disturbance. 1 DS THE COLLECTING NET To decide this question one of my collaborators made comparative investigations of the oxygen intake and the CQO. production -of the isolated spinal cord of the frog, stimulating with induction shocks of various strength either directly or by way of reflex through the sciatic nerve Confirming the results mentioned above he observed in the first case a strong increase of the gas exchange when the electrical current was increased ; the reflexive, that is the physiologi- cal, stimulation on the other hand, produced in the normal spinal cord, no increase, or only an insigniftcant one. In the organ poisoned with strychnine, evidently in consequence of the greater spreading of the ex- citation, the increase was larger, but still much less than with direct stimulation. In the normal as well as in the strychninised spinal cord the increased exchange produced by reflex stimulation obeyed the all- or-none-law and was independent of the strength of the stimulus. The small increase of the metabolism of the normal spinal cord stimulated through the afferent nerve might be explained by the supposition that the excitation extends less far than in the directly stimulated organ. But in the case of strychnine poisoning the state of excitation and its extent reaches the highest degree possible. If in spite of it the increase of metabolism observed in reflex stim- ulation is incomparably less than with direct stimulation, I do not think it possible to explain these phenomena alone by quantitative differences in the metabolic pro- cesses. The same effect seems to result from experiments which I have performed in __ this laboratory concerning the influence which is exerted on the oxygen intake of the nervous system on one hand by the local excitatory process and on the other hand by the pro- used for this purpose a microrespirometer, which allows either a part of the organ situated inside of the respira- tory chamber or a part left outside of it to be stimulated by electrical At first I experimented with the lateral line nerve of the | dogfish, used by Parker. But I did not succeed in getting any increase of oxygen intake whatsoever by electrical stimulation. Afterwards I used the sciatic nerves of the bull- frog. I was surprised to see that : jhere, too, the increase of the gas find, that the oxygen intake obeys | exchange effected by electrical stimulation, even with strong cur- rents, was incomparably less than I had observed in German frogs. Nevertheless in a few experiments the increase was distinct by stimula- tion inside the chamber, so that the difference between the effect of the local excitation and the propagated one appeared quite clearly as the following example shows: (1) emm Oz in 30’ resting 9.3 resting O85 stimulated outside 9, 3 resting 9, 4 stimulated inside 10, 4 resting 10, 0 resting © resting eS (2) cmm Os in 30’ stimulated outside 9. 4 stimulated inside 10, 1 resting OFS stimulated outside 9. 4 stimulated inside 10. 4 These differences can not be ex- plained by a difference in the extent of the stimulation, as in both cases all fibres were stimulated with a current of the same, and surely supermaximal, strength. Still more convincing are the results, which I obtained on the isolated spinal cord of the dogfish and of which I give two examples. The stimulation outside of the respiration chamber does not in- crease the oxygen intake or does only to a very slight degree. which may be conditioried by the spreading of the current to the parts inside the chamber. On the other hand stimulation in- side of it produces an increase of 40-50 or even 75%. If the move- ment of the tail on stimulating the spinal cord is taken as a test of excitability, the latter seems to have disappeared after one hour. Therefore in this experiment the physiological conduction was per- fectly suspended, while the local excitatory process produced by arti- ficial stimulation was preserved. This shows again that the usual method of judging the local excita- bility by the reactions of a remote endorgan is quite subject to error. Spinal cord (Dogfish) Os cemm in 19 min. (1) resting 7.9 resting 8.1 resting 7.9 stimul. outside 8. 2 resting 7,9) resting Ha stimul. inside 10.9 (+45. 3%) resting 10.8 resting 7.6 resting 7.8 stimul. outside &. 3 resting 7.8 resting Tod! resting 38) stimul. inside 11. 8 (+49. 4% ) resting 10. 2 resting 8.6 resting 8.2 (2) resting 8,2 resting 8.1 stimul. outside 8. 2 resting 739 stimul. inside 11.2 (+41, 8%) resting 9.7 Process of Excitation resting 9.0 resting 8.6 stimul. outside 8.4 resting 8.4 stimul. inside 12.3 (+46.4%) resting 10.0 resting 8.8 (3) resting 8.3 resting 8.4 stimul. outside 8. 3 stimul. outside 8.0 stimul. inside 14.0 (+75%) resting S}5 7 resting 10. 1 resting 8.7 Also in the muscle the heat pro- duced by indirect stimulation is, as Fischer found, less than that by direct stimulation, even if the de- veloped tension is the same in both cases.* All these facts seem to be much in favour of the conjecture, that the local excitatory chemical pro- cesses caused by artificial stimula- tion and those of physiological conduction of excitation waves are, at least partly, different not only in quantity but also in quality. One of the most important differences is that the conducting process obeys the all-or-none-law, while the local excitatory process does not. The greater the intensity of a stimulus, the greater, between certain limits are the effects produced on the stimulated part. This is strictly proved by the experiments men- tioned above. Besides, this assump- tion is a logical necessity, for the following reason: Although the conduction of the nervous impulse obeys the all-or-none-law, we are able to distinguish exactly the dif- ferences in intensity of stimuli, even when a single touch-or temperature- point of the skin is stimulated. This fact can only be understood if the varying intensities of excitations are transformed into varying rhythms of the starting excitation waves, as Adrian indeed has shown to be the case. And this transformation seems possible only when the local excitatory processes producing these excitation waves have a varying strength. I believe it was A. V. Hill, who against the experimental results of another investigator objected that the current used by him did not ef- fect an electrical stimulation but an electrical execution of the muscle. I believe every artificial stimulation of an organ—except a sense organ adapted to it—is to a certain degree such an execution, and I believe, that all the investigations made up to now with this method of direct stimulation do not allow any sure conclusion about the chemical pro- cesses which take place, when the organ is excited under physiological conditions. *In a recently published paper Hartree denies however the correct- ness of this experimental result. He found the heat developed to be equal in both conditions. THE COLLECTING NET PAGE SEVEN REVIEW By Dr. Ratpu LILLIE Professor of Physiology, University of Chicago Dr. Winterstein’s lucid and in- teresting exposition shows clearly that in many cases the metabolic effects resulting from a local arti- ficial stimulation may be much greater than those associated with the normal transmission of excita- tion waves along the conducting tracts of the same tissue. This is important, and indicates that the initiation of an excitatory process may include other factors than those associated with transmission pure and simple. An exhaustive discussion of the data and conclu- sions of this lecture is, however, scarcely possible here, and my commentary will be brief and main- ly of a general kind. First we may note that an arti- ficial electrical stimulation, e. g. of the spinal cord, may arouse into activity other cells and elements than those normally involved in the transmissive process considered by itself. These will contribute their quota to the observed metabolism, which will thus be greater than in an excitation in which the conduc- ting tracts alone are activated. Many nerve cells in the cord may not participate in conduction, but all (presumably) are stimulated when an electric shock is passed through the tissue. Similarly, in a medullated nerve the sheath cells are present and must be considered in the total effect. On general grounds it is difficult to believe that the initiatory event in excitation, say of a single nerve fibre, is always and necessarily dif- ferent, in its metabolic and other characters, from the process which constitutes the propagated state of excitation. The latter has in fact physical characters which enable it to activate or excite the adjacent region of the fibre; the self-pro- pagating character of the nerve impulse is thus explained. In other words, activity at one region is the normal initiatory event for activity at an adjacent region. We _ see therefore that under some condi- tions the initiatory process may have the same qualitative and quantitative characters as the trans- mitted process. The transmission of chemical change along a train of powder or along a passive iron wire illustrates the same general prin- ciple. Nevertheless we may admit the possibility that in a normal nerve fibre or other conducting element, more energy may be required to initiate an excitation wave than to keep it going when once it is started. Structural and other con- ditions may render excitation by an external agent relatively difficult. We know that in the living and in- tact animal the receptor process (the initiatory event) often has special features of its own (the case of normal photic or chemical stimu- lation). Dr. Winterstein’s conten- tion, however, is not meant to apply to a physiological complex such as the normal receptor-conductor-ef- fector system, but to a uniform transmitting element, such as a nerve fibre, excited locally by (e. g.) electrical stimulation. In any such system an effective electric stimulus must have a cer- tain minimal intensity, duration and rate of change; it produces locally some alteration which serves as point of departure for the automa- tically self-propagating excitation wave. Now, it might be regarded as a happy accident if this primary alteration had precisely the same characters as the wave which starts from it. A strong shock (e. g.) would produce a more extensive local disturbance, with correspond- ingly greater metabolism, than a weak shock. Dr. Winterstein finds, in fact, that the oxygen consump- tion of various irritable tissues excited electrically increases with the strength of the stimulus; i. e. the immediate or local effect is not constant, as we should expect it to be on the all or none principle. In contrast, the propagated effect, when isolated, shows an essentially constant character, and (in his own experiments) is associated with little or no increase of metabolism. The conducting process, but not the initiatory process, shows the all-or- none characteristic. The excitation Wave, once under way in a normal stretch of tissue, appears to preserve a constant character, i. e., in its velocity, length and electrical varia- tion. These characters are deter- mined by the constitutional proper- ties of the tissue, and their range of variation is narrow. On the other hand, the initiatory process may vary widely; this is shown in the very fact that so many agents may serve as stimuli. It seems to me, briefly, that the differences observed by Dr. Winter- stein point to general conditions of the following kind. The artificial stimulus is usually relatively exten- sive and intense, and produces a greater local structural change and metabolism than those which are associated with the normal excita- tion wave at a distance from its origin. We may perhaps accept the suggestion that something oc- curs in the nature of a local electro- cution; the fact that Levin found fatigue readily producible at the site of stimulation, but not at a distance, agrees with this interpretation. The local change, under the usual’ con- ditions of artificial stimulation, thus involves a greater alteration of the tissue than does the propagated dis- turbance, and correspondingly is associated with a greater metabol- ism. It is surprising that Dr. Winter- stein’s experiments show no dif- ference in oxygen-consumption be- tween the propagating and the resting nerve, since in the work of other investigators marked differ- ences appear. In Gerard’s experi- ments with the frog’s sciatic, the gaseous exchange was increased several times by stimulation. Dr. Winterstein’s. own observations with the isolated spinal cord show that Ov-consumption may vary, under different conditions, quite independently of stimulation; and he concludes that changes of metabolism in irritable tissues are an uncertain index of changes of excitation. The data at present available indicate that the ratio between active and resting meta- bolism varies widely in different conducting tissues and in the same tissue under different conditions. It possible that in certain instances the metabolism associated with transmisson is not quantita- tively greater than in the resting tissue, or is masked by some com- pensatory change. It should recalled, however, that Downing, is Gerard and Hill found the heat production in frog’s nerve to be proportional to the gaseous ex- change; also that the measured heat was nearly equal to that calculated from the oxygen-consumption. It would be interesting to know if transmission in the sciatic nerve and cord under the conditions of Dr. Winterstein’s experiments is associated with increased heat pro- duction. SURVEY OF AQUATIC PLANTS UNDER WAY Tue CottectrncG Ner Scholarship in Botany of $100.00 for this year has been devoted to starting a new and important project, namely pre- paring a catalogue of the aquatic plant life of Woods Hole and vicinity. The need of such a cata- logue is urgent for student refer- ence and as an indication of sources for research material. Amazingly little has been done in this line. B. M. Davis has pub- lished in the Report of the U. S. Fisheries Commission a list of marine Algae with elaborate station and seasonal records, but with no keys, descriptions or illustrations. A list of the flowering plants of this region by John M. Fogg, Jr. is now in preparation and includes the aquatic flowering plants.